Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Ecomat Mobile Series

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 298
At a glance
Powered by AI
The manual provides information about the SmartController CR2500 system including safety instructions, system description, configurations, operating states, and error codes.

Information provided includes that it is an ecomatmobile SmartController with model number CR2500.

Information provided includes that it uses CoDeSys software and describes the PLC configuration.

System Manual

SmartController

CR2500

CoDeSys® V2.3
Target V05
10 / 2009
7390675 / 00
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Contents

Contents

1 About this manual 7


1.1 What do the symbols and formats mean?.........................................................................7
1.2 How is this manual structured? .........................................................................................8

2 Safety instructions 9
2.1 General..............................................................................................................................9
2.2 What previous knowledge is required? ...........................................................................10

3 System description 11
3.1 Information concerning the device ..................................................................................11
3.2 Information concerning the software ...............................................................................11
3.3 PLC configuration ............................................................................................................12

4 Configurations 13
4.1 Set up programming system ...........................................................................................14
4.1.1 Set up programming system manually..........................................................14
4.1.2 Set up programming system via templates...................................................16
4.1.3 ifm demo programs .......................................................................................25
4.2 Function configuration of the inputs and outputs ............................................................29
4.2.1 Configure inputs ............................................................................................29
4.2.2 Configure outputs..........................................................................................33
4.3 Hints to wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................34

5 Operating states and operating system 35


5.1 Operating states ..............................................................................................................35
5.1.1 Reset .............................................................................................................35
5.1.2 Run state.......................................................................................................35
5.1.3 Stop state ......................................................................................................35
5.1.4 Fatal error......................................................................................................35
5.1.5 No operating system .....................................................................................36
5.2 Status LED ......................................................................................................................36
5.3 Load the operating system ..............................................................................................37
5.4 Operating modes .............................................................................................................37
5.4.1 TEST mode ...................................................................................................38
5.4.2 SERIAL_MODE.............................................................................................38
5.4.3 DEBUG mode ...............................................................................................38

6 Error codes and diagnostic information 39


6.1 Response to the system error .........................................................................................40
6.1.1 Notes on devices with monitoring relay ........................................................40
6.1.2 Example process for response to a system error .........................................41

2
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Contents

7 Programming and system resources 42


7.1 Above-average stress .....................................................................................................42
7.2 Limits of the SmartController...........................................................................................43
7.3 Watchdog behaviour .......................................................................................................44
7.4 Available memory ............................................................................................................44
7.5 Program creation and download in the PLC ...................................................................45

8 CAN in the ecomatmobile controller 47


8.1 General about CAN .........................................................................................................47
8.1.1 Topology .......................................................................................................47
8.1.2 CAN interfaces ..............................................................................................48
8.1.3 System configuration.....................................................................................48
8.2 Exchange of CAN data....................................................................................................49
8.2.1 CAN-ID ..........................................................................................................49
8.2.2 Data reception...............................................................................................50
8.2.3 Data transmission .........................................................................................50
8.3 Physical connection of CAN ............................................................................................51
8.3.1 Network structure ..........................................................................................51
8.3.2 Bus level........................................................................................................52
8.3.3 Bus cable length............................................................................................53
8.3.4 Wire cross-sections.......................................................................................54
8.4 Software for CAN and CANopen.....................................................................................55
8.5 CAN errors and error handling ........................................................................................55
8.5.1 Error message...............................................................................................55
8.5.2 Error counter .................................................................................................56
8.5.3 Participant, error active .................................................................................56
8.5.4 Participant, error passive ..............................................................................56
8.5.5 Participant, bus off ........................................................................................57
8.6 Description of the CAN functions ....................................................................................58
8.6.1 Function CAN1_BAUDRATE ........................................................................59
8.6.2 Function CAN1_DOWNLOADID...................................................................61
8.6.3 Function CAN1_EXT.....................................................................................63
8.6.4 Function CAN1_EXT_TRANSMIT ................................................................65
8.6.5 Function CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE...................................................................67
8.6.6 Function CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER ....................................................69
8.6.7 Function CAN2..............................................................................................70
8.6.8 Function CANx_TRANSMIT .........................................................................72
8.6.9 Function CANx_RECEIVE ............................................................................74
8.6.10 Function CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE .............................................................76
8.6.11 Function CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL...........................................................79
8.6.12 Function CANx_ERRORHANDLER..............................................................81
8.7 ifm CANopen library ........................................................................................................83
8.7.1 CANopen support by CoDeSys ....................................................................83
8.7.2 CANopen master...........................................................................................85
8.7.3 Start-up of the network without [Automatic startup] ......................................96
8.7.4 CAN device ................................................................................................ 100
8.7.5 CAN network variables............................................................................... 108
8.7.6 Information on the EMCY and error codes ................................................ 113
8.7.7 Library for the CANopen master ................................................................ 117
8.7.8 Library for the CANopen slave................................................................... 129
8.7.9 Further ifm libraries for CANopen .............................................................. 139
8.8 Summary CAN / CANopen........................................................................................... 144
8.9 Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939..................................................................... 145
8.9.1 Function J1939_x....................................................................................... 148
8.9.2 Function J1939_x_RECEIVE..................................................................... 150

3
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Contents

8.9.3 Function J1939_x_TRANSMIT .................................................................. 152


8.9.4 Function J1939_x_RESPONSE................................................................. 154
8.9.5 Function J1939_x_SPECIFIC_REQUEST................................................. 156
8.9.6 Function J1939_x_GLOBAL_REQUEST................................................... 158

9 PWM in the ecomatmobile controller 160


9.1 PWM signal processing................................................................................................ 161
9.1.1 PWM functions and their parameters (general) ......................................... 161
9.1.2 Function PWM............................................................................................ 166
9.1.3 Function PWM100...................................................................................... 168
9.1.4 Function PWM1000.................................................................................... 170
9.2 Current control with PWM ............................................................................................ 172
9.2.1 Current measurement with PWM channels ............................................... 172
9.2.2 Function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL .............................................. 173
9.2.3 Function OCC_TASK ................................................................................. 175
9.2.4 Function OUTPUT_CURRENT.................................................................. 177
9.3 Hydraulic control in PWM ............................................................................................. 178
9.3.1 The purpose of this library? – An introduction ........................................... 178
9.3.2 What does a PWM output do? ................................................................... 179
9.3.3 What is the dither? ..................................................................................... 180
9.3.4 Functions of the library "ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib" ....... 182
9.3.5 Function CONTROL_OCC......................................................................... 183
9.3.6 Function JOYSTICK_0............................................................................... 186
9.3.7 Function JOYSTICK_1............................................................................... 190
9.3.8 Function JOYSTICK_2............................................................................... 194
9.3.9 Function NORM_HYDRAULIC .................................................................. 197

10 More functions in the ecomatmobile controller 200


10.1 Counter functions for frequency and period measurement.......................................... 200
10.1.1 Applications................................................................................................ 201
10.1.2 Use as digital inputs ................................................................................... 201
10.1.3 Function FREQUENCY.............................................................................. 202
10.1.4 Function PERIOD....................................................................................... 204
10.1.5 Function PERIOD_RATIO ......................................................................... 206
10.1.6 Function PHASE ........................................................................................ 208
10.1.7 Function INC_ENCODER .......................................................................... 210
10.1.8 Function FAST_COUNT ............................................................................ 213
10.2 Software reset .............................................................................................................. 215
10.2.1 Function SOFTRESET............................................................................... 215
10.3 Saving, reading and converting data in the memory.................................................... 216
10.3.1 Automatic data backup............................................................................... 216
10.3.2 Manual data storage .................................................................................. 216
10.3.3 Function MEMCPY..................................................................................... 217
10.3.4 Function FLASHWRITE ............................................................................. 218
10.3.5 Function FLASHREAD............................................................................... 220
10.3.6 Function E2WRITE .................................................................................... 221
10.3.7 Function E2READ ...................................................................................... 222
10.4 Data access and data check ........................................................................................ 223
10.4.1 Function SET_DEBUG............................................................................... 223
10.4.2 Function SET_IDENTITY........................................................................... 224
10.4.3 Function GET_IDENTITY........................................................................... 226
10.4.4 Function SET_PASSWORD ...................................................................... 228
10.4.5 Function CHECK_DATA ............................................................................ 230
10.5 Processing interrupts.................................................................................................... 232
10.5.1 Function SET_INTERRUPT_XMS............................................................. 233
10.5.2 Function SET_INTERRUPT_I.................................................................... 236

4
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Contents

10.6 Use of the serial interface............................................................................................. 239


10.6.1 Function SERIAL_SETUP ......................................................................... 240
10.6.2 Function SERIAL_TX ................................................................................. 242
10.6.3 Function SERIAL_RX................................................................................. 243
10.6.4 Function SERIAL_PENDING ..................................................................... 245
10.7 Reading the system time.............................................................................................. 246
10.7.1 Function TIMER_READ ............................................................................. 246
10.7.2 Function TIMER_READ_US ...................................................................... 247
10.8 Processing analogue input values................................................................................ 248
10.8.1 Function INPUT_ANALOG......................................................................... 249
10.8.2 Function INPUT_VOLTAGE ...................................................................... 251
10.8.3 Function INPUT_CURRENT ...................................................................... 252
10.9 Adapting analogue values ............................................................................................ 253
10.9.1 Function NORM ......................................................................................... 254

11 Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller 256


11.1 General......................................................................................................................... 256
11.1.1 Self-regulating process .............................................................................. 256
11.1.2 Controlled system without inherent regulation........................................... 257
11.1.3 Controlled system with delay ..................................................................... 257
11.2 Setting rule for a controller ........................................................................................... 258
11.2.1 Setting control ............................................................................................ 258
11.2.2 Damping of overshoot ................................................................................ 258
11.3 Functions for controllers ............................................................................................... 259
11.3.1 Function DELAY......................................................................................... 260
11.3.2 Function PT1.............................................................................................. 262
11.3.3 Function PID1 ............................................................................................ 264
11.3.4 Function PID2 ............................................................................................ 266
11.3.5 Function GLR ............................................................................................. 269

12 Annex 271
12.1 Address assignment and I/O operating modes ............................................................ 272
12.1.1 Addresses / variables of the I/Os ............................................................... 272
12.1.2 Address assignment inputs / outputs ......................................................... 272
12.1.3 Possible operating modes inputs / outputs ................................................ 273
12.2 System flags ................................................................................................................. 274
12.3 Overview of the files and libraries used ....................................................................... 275
12.3.1 General overview ....................................................................................... 275
12.3.2 What are the individual files and libraries used for? .................................. 277

13 Glossary of Terms 281

14 Index 293

5
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

About this manual What do the symbols and formats mean?

1 About this manual


What do the symbols and formats mean? ...................................................................................7
How is this manual structured? ...................................................................................................8

In this chapter you will find an overview of the following points:


• What do the symbols and formats stand for?
• How is this manual structured?
In the additional "Programming Manual for CoDeSys® V2.3" you will obtain more details about the use
of the programming system "CoDeSys for Automation Alliance™". This manual can be downloaded
free of charge from ifm's website:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Service] > [Download] > [Control systems]
→ ifm-CD "Software, tools and documentation"
Nobody is perfect. Send us your suggestions for improvements to this manual and you will receive a
little gift from us to thank you.
© All rights reserved by ifm electronic gmbh. No part of this manual may be reproduced and used
without the consent of ifm electronic gmbh.
All product names, pictures, companies or other brands used on our pages are the property of the
respective rights owners.

1.1 What do the symbols and formats mean?


The following symbols or pictograms depict different kinds of remarks in our manuals:

DANGER
Death or serious irreversible injuries are to be expected.

WARNING
Death or serious irreversible injuries are possible.

CAUTION
Slight reversible injuries are possible.

NOTICE
Property damage is to be expected or possible.

NOTE
Important notes to faults and errors.

7
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

About this manual How is this manual structured?

Info
Further hints.

► ... Required action


> ... Response, effect
→ ... "see"
abc Cross references (links)
[...] Designations of keys, buttons or display

1.2 How is this manual structured?


This documentation is a combination of different types of manuals. It is for beginners and also a
reference for advanced users.
How to use this documentation:
• Refer to the table of contents to select a specific subject.
• At the beginning of a chapter we will give you a brief overview of its contents.
• Abbreviations and technical terms are listed in the glossary.
• The print version of the manual contains a search index in the annex.
In case of malfunctions or uncertainties please contact the manufacturer at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Contact]
We reserve the right to make alterations which can result in a change of contents of the
documentation. You can find the current version on ifm's website at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Service] > [Download] > [Control systems]

8
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Safety instructions General

2 Safety instructions
General ........................................................................................................................................9
What previous knowledge is required?......................................................................................10

2.1 General
No characteristics are warranted with the information, notes and examples provided in this manual.
The drawings, representations and examples imply no responsibility for the system and no application-
specific particularities.
The manufacturer of the machine/equipment is responsible for the safety of the machine/equipment.

WARNING
Property damage or bodily injury possible when the notes in this manual are not adhered to!
ifm electronic gmbh does not assume any liability in this regard.
► The acting person must have read and understood the safety instructions and the corresponding
chapters of this manual before performing any work on or with this device.
► The acting person must be authorised to work on the machine/equipment.
► Adhere to the technical data of the devices!
You can find the current data sheet on ifm's homepage at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Data sheet direct] > (Article no.) > [Technical data in
PDF format]
► Note the installation and wiring information as well as the functions and features of the devices!
→ supplied installation instructions or on ifm's homepage:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Data sheet direct] > (Article no.) > [Operating
instructions]

ATTENTION
The driver module of the serial interface can be damaged!
Disconnecting the serial interface while live can cause undefined states which damage the driver
module.
► Do not disconnect the serial interface while live.

Start-up behaviour of the controller


The manufacturer of the machine/equipment must ensure with his application program that when the
controller starts or restarts no dangerous movements can be triggered.
A restart can, for example, be caused by:
• voltage restoration after power failure
• reset after watchdog response because of too long a cycle time

9
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Safety instructions What previous knowledge is required?

2.2 What previous knowledge is required?


This document is intended for people with knowledge of control technology and PLC programming
with IEC 61131-3.
If this device contents a PLC, in addition these persons should know the CoDeSys® software.
The document is intended for specialists. These specialists are people who are qualified by their
training and their experience to see risks and to avoid possible hazards that may be caused during
operation or maintenance of a product. The document contains information about the correct handling
of the product.
Read this document before use to familiarise yourself with operating conditions, installation and
operation. Keep the document during the entire duration of use of the device.
Adhere to the safety instructions.

10
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

System description Information concerning the device

3 System description
Information concerning the device.............................................................................................11
Information concerning the software .........................................................................................11
PLC configuration ......................................................................................................................12

3.1 Information concerning the device


This manual describes the ecomatmobile controller family of ifm electronic gmbh with a 16-bit
microcontroller for mobile vehicles:
• SmartController: CR2500

3.2 Information concerning the software


The controller operates with CoDeSys®, version 2.3.9.1 or higher.
In the "programming manual CoDeSys® 2.3" you will find more details about how to use the
programming system "CoDeSys for Automation Alliance". This manual can be downloaded free of
charge from ifm's website at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Service] > [Download] > [Control systems]
→ ifm-CD "Software, tools and documentation"
The application software can be easily designed by the user with the programming system CoDeSys®.
Moreover the user must take into account which software version is used (in particular for the
operating system and the function libraries).

NOTE:
The software versions suitable for the selected target must always be used:
• of the operating system (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.H86),
• of the PLC configuration (CRnnnn_Vxx.CFG),
• of the device library (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.LIB),
• and the further files (→ chapter Overview of the files and libraries used, → page 275)
CRnnnn device article number
Vxx: 00...99 target version number
yy: 00...99 release number
zz: 00...99 patch number
The basic file name (e.g. "CR0032") and the software version number "xx" (e.g. "02") must always have
the same value! Otherwise the controller goes to the STOP mode.
The values for "yy" (release number) and "zz" (patch number) do not have to match.

Also note: the following files must also be loaded:


• The for the project required internal libraries (designed in IEC1131),
• the configuration files (*.CFG)
• and the target files (*.TRG).

11
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

System description PLC configuration

Also note:
The target for CRnn32 must be > V02, for all other devices > V05.
The user is responsible for the reliable function of the application programs he designed. If necessary,
he must additionally carry out an approval test by corresponding supervisory and test organisations
according to the national regulations.

3.3 PLC configuration


The control system ecomatmobile is a device concept for series use. This means that the controllers
can be configured in an optimum manner for the applications. If necessary, special functions and
hardware solutions can be implemented. In addition, the current version of the ecomatmobile
software can be downloaded from our website at: www.ifm.com.
Before using the controllers it must be checked whether certain functions, hardware options, inputs
and outputs described in the documentation are available in the hardware.

12
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations PLC configuration

4 Configurations
Set up programming system......................................................................................................14
Function configuration of the inputs and outputs.......................................................................29
Hints to wiring diagrams ............................................................................................................34

The device configurations described in the corresponding installation instructions and in the annex
(→ page 271) to this documentation are used for standard devices (stock items). They fulfil the
requested specifications of most applications.
Depending on the customer requirements for series use it is, however, also possible to use other
device configurations, e.g. with respect to the inputs/outputs and analogue channels.

WARNING
Property damage or bodily injury possible due to malfunctions!
The software functions described in this documentation only apply to the standard configurations. In
case of use of customer-specific devices:
► Note the special hardware versions and additional remarks (additional documentation) on use of
the software.

Installation of the files and libraries in the device:


Factory setting: the device contains only the boot loader.
► Load the operating system (*.H86)
► Create the project (*.PRO) in the PC: enter the target (*.TRG)
► (Additionally for targets before V05:) define the PLC configuration (*.CFG)
> CoDeSys® integrates the files belonging to the target into the project:
*.TRG, *.CFG, *.CHM, *.INI, *.LIB
► If required, add further libraries to the project (*.LIB).
Certain libraries automatically integrate further libraries into the project.
Some functions in ifm libraries (ifm_*.LIB) e.g. are based on functions in CoDeSys® libraries
(3S_*.LIB).

13
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

4.1 Set up programming system

4.1.1 Set up programming system manually

Setup the target


When creating a new project in CoDeSys® the target file corresponding to the controller must be
loaded. It is selected in the dialogue window for all hardware and acts as an interface to the hardware
for the programming system.

Figure: Target system settings

At the same time, all important libraries and the PLC configuration are loaded when selecting the
target. These can be removed by the programmer or complemented by further libraries, if necessary.

NOTE:
The software versions suitable for the selected target must always be used:
• of the operating system (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.H86),
• of the PLC configuration (CRnnnn_Vxx.CFG),
• of the device library (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.LIB),
• and the further files (→ chapter Overview of the files and libraries used, → page 275)
CRnnnn device article number
Vxx: 00...99 target version number
yy: 00...99 release number
zz: 00...99 patch number
The basic file name (e.g. "CR0032") and the software version number "xx" (e.g. "02") must always have
the same value! Otherwise the controller goes to the STOP mode.
The values for "yy" (release number) and "zz" (patch number) do not have to match.

Also note: the following files must also be loaded:


• The for the project required internal libraries (designed in IEC1131),
• the configuration files (*.CFG)
• and the target files (*.TRG).

14
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Activating the PLC configuration


During the configuration of the programming system (→ previous section) automatically also the PLC
configuration was carried out.
The point [PLC Configuration] is reached via the tab [Resources]. Double-click on [PLC Configuration]
to open the corresponding window.
► Click on the tab [Resources] in CoDeSys®:

► Double-click on [PLC Configuration] in the left column.


> Display of the current PLC configuration (→ following figure):

Based on the configuration the following is available in the program environment for the user:
• All important system and error flags
Depending on the application and the application program, these flags must be processed and
evaluated. Access is made via their symbolic names.
• The structure of the inputs and outputs
These can be directly symbolically designated (highly recommended!) in the window [PLC
Configuration] (example → figure below) and are available in the whole project as [Global
Variables].

15
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

4.1.2 Set up programming system via templates


ifm offers ready-to-use templates (program templates) for a fast, simple, and complete setting up of
the programming system.

NOTE
When installing the ecomatmobile CD "Software, Tools and Documentation", projects with templates
have been stored in the program directory of your PC:
…\ifm electronic\CoDeSys V…\Projects\Template_CDVxxyyzz
► Open the requested template in CoDeSys via:
[File] > [New from template…]
> CoDeSys creates a new project which shows the basic program structure. It is strongly
recommended to follow the shown procedure.
→ chapter Set up programming system via templates (→ page 16)

How do you set up the programming system fast and simply?


► In the CoDeSys menu select: [File] > [New from template...]
► Select directory of the current CD, e.g. ...\Projects\TEMPLATE_CDV010500:

16
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

► Find article number of the unit in the list, e.g. CR2500 as CANopen master:

► How is the CAN network organised?


Do you want to work on layer 2 basis or is there a master with several slaves (for CANopen)?
(Here an example: CANopen-Slave, → figure above)
► Confirm the selection with [Open].
> A new CoDeSys project is generated with the following folder structure (left):
Example for CR2500 as CANopen master: Another example for CR1051 as CANopen slave:

(via the folder structures in Templates → Section About the ifm Templates, → page 18).
► Save the new project with [file] > [Save as...], and define suitable directory and project name.
► Configuration of the CAN network in the project:
Double click the element [PLC configuration] above the tabulator [resources] in the CoDeSys
project.
► Right mouse click in the entry [CR2500, CANopen Master]
► Click in the context menu [Append subelement]:

> A list of all available EDS files appears in the extended context menu.
17
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

► Select requested element, e.g. "System R360": I/O CompactModule CR2011 (EDS)".
The EDS files are in directory C:\…\CoDeSys V…\Library\PLCConf\.
> The window [PLC configuration] changes as follows:

► Set CAN parameters, PDO mapping and SDOs for the entered slave according to the
requirements. Note: Better deselect [Create all SDOs].
► With further slaves proceed as described above.
► Save the project!
This should be a sufficient description of your project. You want to supplement this project with further
elements and functions?
→ chapter Supplement project with further functions (→ page 23)

About the ifm templates


As a rule the following templates are offered for each unit:
• ifm_template_CRnnnnLayer2_Vxxyyzz.pro for the operation of the unit with CAN layer 2
• ifm_template_CRnnnnMaster_Vxxyyzz.pro for the operation of the unit as CAN master
• ifm_template_CRnnnnSlave_Vxxyyzz.pro for the operation of the unit as CAN slave
The templates described here are for:
- CoDeSys from version 2.3.9.6
- on the ecomatmobile-CD from version 010500
The templates all have the same structures.
The selection of this program template for CAN operation already is an important basis for a
functioning program.

18
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Folder structure in general


The POUs are sorted in the following folders:
Folder Description
CAN_OPEN for Controller and PDM,
CAN operation as master or slave:
contains the functions for CANopen.
I_O_CONFIGURATION for Controller,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Functions for parameter setting of the operating modes of the inputs and outputs.
PDM_COM_LAYER2 for Controller,
CAN operation as layer 2 or as slave:
Functions for basis communication via layer 2 between PLC and PDM.
CONTROL_CR10nn for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Contains functions for image and key control during operation.
PDM_DISPLAY_SETTINGS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Contains functions for adjusting the monitor.

Programs and functions in the folders of the templates


The above folders contain the following programs and functions (= POUs):
POUs in the folder Description
CAN_OPEN
CANopen for Controller and PDM,
CAN operation as master:
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- CAN1_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER
(→ Function CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER, → page 118),
- CAN1_MASTER_STATUS (→ Function CANx_MASTER_STATUS, → page 123),
- SELECT_NODESTATE (→ down).
CANopen for Controller and PDM,
CAN operation as slave:
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- CAN1_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER
(→ Function CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER, → page 131),
- CAN1_SLAVE_STATUS (→ Function CANx_SLAVE_STATUS, → page 136),
- SELECT_NODESTATE (→ down).
Objekt1xxxh for Controller and PDM,
CAN operation as slave:
Contains the values [STRING] for the following parameters:
- ManufacturerDeviceName, e.g.: 'CR1051'
- ManufacturerHardwareVersion, e.g.: 'HW_Ver 1.0'
- ManufacturerSoftwareVersion, e.g.: 'SW_Ver 1.0'

19
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

POUs in the folder Description


CAN_OPEN
SELECT_NODESTATE for PDM,
CAN operation as master or slave:
Converts the value of the node status [BYTE] into the corresponding text [STRING]:
4 → 'STOPPED'
5 → 'OPERATIONAL'
127 → 'PRE-OPERATIONAL'

POUs in the folder Description


I_O_CONFIGURATION
CONF_IO_CRnnnn for Controller,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Parameterises the operating modes of the inputs and outputs.

POUs in the folder Description


PDM_COM_LAYER2
PLC_TO_PDM for Controller,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as slave:
Organises the communication from the Controller to the PDM:
- monitors the transmission time,
- transmits control data for image change, input values etc.
TO_PDM for Controller,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as slave:
Organises the signals for LEDs and keys between Controller and PDM.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- PACK (→ 3S),
- PLC_TO_PDM (→ up),
- UNPACK (→ 3S).

POUs in the folder Description


CONTROL_CR10nn
CONTROL_PDM for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Organises the image control in the PDM.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- PACK (→ 3S),
- PDM_MAIN_MAPPER,
- PDM_PAGECONTROL,
- PDM_TO_PLC (→ down),
- SELECT_PAGE (→ down).

20
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

POUs in the folder Description


CONTROL_CR10nn
PDM_TO_PLC for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2:
Organises the communication from the PDM to the Controller:
- monitors the transmission time,
- transmits control data for image change, input values etc.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- CAN_1_TRANSMIT,
- CAN_1_RECEIVE.
RT_SOFT_KEYS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Provides the rising edges of the (virtual) key signals in the PDM. As many variables as
desired (as virtual keys) can be mapped on the global variable SoftKeyGlobal when e.g.
a program part is to be copied from a CR1050 to a CR1055. It contains only the keys
F1...F3:
→ For the virtual keys F4...F6 variables have to be created. Map these self-created
variables on the global softkeys. Work only with the global softkeys in the program.
Advantage: Adaptations are only required in one place.
SELECT_PAGE for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Organises the selection of the visualisations.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- RT_SOFT_KEYS (→ up).

POUs in the folder Description


PDM_DISPLAY_SETTINGS
CHANGE_BRIGHTNESS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Organises brightness / contrast of the monitor.
DISPLAY_SETTINGS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Sets the real-time clock, controls brightness / contrast of the monitor, shows the
software version.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- CHANGE_BRIGHTNESS (→ up),
- CurTimeEx (→ 3S),
- PDM_SET_RTC,
- READ_SOFTWARE_VERS (→ down),
(→ 3S).
READ_SOFTWARE_VERS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Shows the software version.
Contains the following parameterised POUs:
- DEVICE_KERNEL_VERSION1,
- DEVICE_RUNTIME_VERSION,
- LEFT (→ 3S).

21
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

POUs in the root directory Description


PLC_CYCLE for Controller,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Determines the cycle time of the PLC in the unit.
PDM_CYCLE_MS for PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Determines the cycle time of the PLC in the unit.
PLC_PRG for Controller and PDM,
CAN operation with layer 2 or as master or slave:
Main program This is where further program elements are included.

Structure of the visualisations in the templates


(Only for PDM)
The visualisations are structured in folders as follows:
Folder Image no. Description contents
START_PAGE P00001 Setting / display of...
- node ID
- CAN baud rate
- status
- GuardErrorNode
- PLC cycle time
__MAIN_MENUES P00010 Menu screen:
- Display setup
____MAIN_MENUE_1
______DISPLAY_SETUP
________1_DISPLAY_SETUP1 P65000 Menu screen:
- Software version
- brightness / contrast
- display / set real-time clock
__________1_SOFTWARE_VERSION P65010 Display of the software version.
__________2_BRIGHTNESS P65020 Adjustment of brightness / contrast
__________3_SET_RTC P65030 Display / set real-time clock
In the templates we have organised the image numbers in steps of 10. This way you can switch into
different language versions of the visualisations by means of an image number offset.

22
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Supplement project with further functions


You have created a project using an ifm template and you have defined the CAN network. Now you
want to add further functions to this project.
For the example we take a CabinetController CR2500 as CAN open Master to which an I/O
CabinetModule CR2011 and an I/O compact module are connected as slaves:
PLC configuration:

A joystick is connected to the CR2012 which is to trigger a PWM output on the CR2032. How is that
achieved in a fast and simple way?
► Save CoDeSys project!
► In CoDeSys use [Project] > [Copy...] to open the project containing the requested function:
e.g. CR2500Demo_CR2012_02.pro from directory DEMO_PLC_CDV… underC:\...\CoDeSys
V…\Projects\:

► Confirm the selection with [Open].


> Window [Copy objects] appears:

23
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

► Highlight the elements which contain only the requested function, in this case e.g.:

NOTE: In other cases libraries and/or visualisations might be required.


► Confirm the selection with [OK].
> In our example project the elements selected in the demo project have been added:
POUs: Resources:

► Insert the program [CR2012] in the main program [PLC_PRG] e.g.:

► The comments of the POUs and global variables usually contain information on how the individual
elements have to be configured, included or excluded. This information has to be followed.
► Adapt input and output variables as well as parameters and possible visualisations to your own
conditions.
► [Project] > [Save] and
[Project] > [Rebuild all].

24
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

► After possibly required corrections and addition of missing libraries (→ Error messages after
rebuild) save the project again.
► Follow this principle to step by step (!) add further functions from other projects and check the
results.
► [Project] > [Save] and
[Project] > [Rebuild all].

4.1.3 ifm demo programs


In directory DEMO_PLC_CDV… (for Controller) or DEMO_PDM_CDV… (für PDMs) under
C:\¼\CoDeSys V…\Projects\ we explain certain functions in tested demo programs. If required,
these functions can be implemented in own projects. Structures and variables of the ifm demos match
those in the ifm templates.
Each demo program shows just one topic. For the Controller as well some visualisations are shown
which demonstrate the tested function on the PC screen.
Comments in the POUs and in the variable lists help you adapt the demo to your project.
If not stated otherwise the demo programs apply to all controllers or to all PDMs.
The demo programs described here apply for:
- CoDeSys from version 2.3.9.6
- on the ecomatmobile CD from version 010500

Demo program for controller


Demo program Function
CR2500Demo_CanTool_xx.pro separate for PDM360, PDM360 compact, PDM360
smart and Controller:
Contains functions to set and analyse the CAN
interface.
CR2500Demo_ClockFu_xx.pro Clock generator for Controller as a function of a
CR2500Demo_ClockKo_xx.pro value on an analogue input:
CR2500Demo_ClockSt_xx.pro Fu = in function block diagram
K0 = in ladder diagram
St = in structured text
CR2500Demo_CR1500_xx.pro Connection of a keypad module CR1500 as slave of
a Controller (CANopen master).
CR2500Demo_CR2012_xx.pro I/O cabinet module CR2012 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
Connection of a joystick with direction switch and
reference medium voltage.
CR2500Demo_CR2016_xx.pro I/O cabinet module CR2016 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
4 x frequency input,
4 x digital input high side,
4 x digital input low side,
4 x analogue input ratiometric,
4 x PWM1000 output and
12 x digital output.

25
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Demo program Function


CR2500Demo_CR2031_xx.pro I/O compact module CR2031 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
Current measurement on the PWM outputs
CR2500Demo_CR2032_xx.pro I/O compact module CR2032 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
4 x digital input,
4 x digital input analogue evaluation,
4 x digital output,
4 x PWM output.
CR2500Demo_CR2033_xx.pro I/O compact module CR2033 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
4 x digital input,
4 x digital input analogue evaluation,
4 x digital output,
CR2500Demo_CR2101_xx.pro Inclination sensor CR2101 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master).
CR2500Demo_CR2102_xx.pro Inclination sensor CR2102 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master).
CR2500Demo_CR2511_xx.pro I/O smart module CR2511 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
8 x PWM output current-controlled.
CR2500Demo_CR2512_xx.pro I/O smart module CR2512 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
8 x PWM output.
Display of the current current for each channel pair.
CR2500Demo_CR2513_xx.pro I/O smart module CR2513 as slave of a Controller
(CANopen master),
4 x digital input,
4 x digital output,
4 x analogue input 0...10 V.
CR2500Demo_Interrupt_xx.pro Example with function SET_INTERRUPT_XMS
(→ page 232).
CR2500Demo_Operating_hours_xx.pro Example of an operating hours counter with
interface to a PDM.
CR2500Demo_PWM_xx.pro Converts a potentiometer value on an input into a
normed value on an output with the following POUs:
- Function INPUT_VOLTAGE (→ page 250),
- Function NORM (→ page 253),
- Function PWM100 (→ page 167).
CR2500Demo_RS232_xx.pro Example for the reception of data on the serial
interface by means of the Windows hyper terminal.
StartersetDemo.pro Various e-learning exercises with the starter set
StartersetDemo2.pro EC2074.
StartersetDemo2_fertig.pro
_xx = indication of the demo version

26
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Demo program for PDM:


Demo program Function
CR1051Demo_CanTool_xx.pro separate for PDM360, PDM360 compact, PDM360
CR1053Demo_CanTool_xx.pro smart and Controller:
CR1071Demo_CanTool_xx.pro
Contains functions to set and analyse the CAN
interface.
CR1051Demo_Input_Character_xx.pro Allows to enter any character in a character string:
- capital letters,
- small letters,
- special characters,
- figures.
Selection of the characters via encoder. Example
also suited for e.g. entering a password.
Figure P01000: Selection and takeover of characters
CR1051Demo_Input_Lib_xx.pro Demo of function INPUT_INT from the library
ifm_pdm_input_Vxxyyzz (possible alternative to
3S standard). Select and set values via encoder.
Figure P10000: 6 values INT
Figure P10010: 2 values INT
Figure P10020: 1 value REAL
CR1051Demo_Linear_logging_on_flash Writes a CVS data block with the contents of a CAN
_intern_xx.pro message in the internal flash memory
(/home/project/daten.csv), when [F3] is
pressed or a CAN message is received on ID 100.
When the defined memory range is full the recording
of the data is finished.
POUs used:
- Function WRITE_CSV_8BYTE,
- Function SYNC.
Figure P35010: Display of data information
Figure P35020: Display of current data record
Figure P35030: Display of list of 10 data records
CR1051Demo_O2M_1Cam_xx.pro Connection of 1 camera O2M100 to the monitor with
function CAM_O2M. Switching between partial
screen and full screen.
Figure 39000: Selection menu
Figure 39010: Camera image + text box
Figure 39020: Camera image as full screen
Figure 39030: Visualisation only
CR1051Demo_O2M_2Cam_xx.pro Connection of 2 cameras O2M100 to the monitor
with function CAM_O2M. Switching between the
cameras and between partial screen and full screen.
Figure 39000: Selection menu
Figure 39010: Camera image + text box
Figure 39020: Camera image as full screen
Figure 39030: Visualisation only

27
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Set up programming system

Demo program Function


CR1051Demo_Powerdown_Retain_bin Example with function PDM_POWER_DOWN from
_xx.pro the library ifm_CR1051_Vxxyyzz.Lib, to save
retain variable in the file Retain.bin. Simulation of
ShutDown with [F3].
CR1051Demo_Powerdown_Retain_bin2 Example with function PDM_POWER_DOWN from
_xx.pro the library ifm_CR1051_Vxxyyzz.Lib, to save
retain variable in the file Retain.bin. Simulation of
ShutDown with [F3].
CR1051Demo_Powerdown_Retain_cust Example with function PDM_POWER_DOWN and
_xx.pro the function PDM_READ_RETAIN from the library
ifm_CR1051_Vxxyyzz.Lib, to save retain
variable in the file
/home/project/myretain.bin. Simulation of
ShutDown with [F3].
CR1051Demo_Read_Textline_xx.pro The example program reads 7 text lines at a time
from the PDM file system using function
READ_TEXTLINE.
Figure P01000: Display of read text
CR1051Demo_Real_in_xx.pro Simple example for entering a REAL value in the
PDM.
Figure P01000: Enter and display REAL value
CR1051Demo_Ringlogging_on_flash Writes a CVS data block in the internal flash memory
_intern_xx.pro when [F3] is pressed or a CAN message is received
on ID 100. The file names can be freely defined.
When the defined memory range is full the recording
of the data starts again.
POUs used:
- Function WRITE_CSV_8BYTE,
- Function SYNC.
Figure P35010: Display of data information
Figure P35020: Display of current data record
Figure P35030: Display of list of 8 data records
CR1051Demo_Ringlogging_on_flash Writes a CVS data block on the PCMCIA card when
_pcmcia_xx.pro [F3] is pressed or a CAN message is received on
ID 100. The file names can be freely defined. When
the defined memory range is full the recording of the
data starts again.
POUs used:
- Function WRITE_CSV_8BYTE,
- Function OPEN_PCMCIA,
- Function SYNC.
Figure P35010: Display of data information
Figure P35020: Display of current data record
Figure P35030: Display of list of 8 data records

28
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Function configuration of the inputs and outputs

Demo program Function


CR1051Demo_RW-Parameter_xx.pro In a list parameters can be selected and changed.
Example with the following POUs:
- Function READ_PARAMETER_WORD,
- Function WRITE_PARAMETER_WORD.
Figure P35010: List of 20 parameters
_xx = indication of the demo version

4.2 Function configuration of the inputs and


outputs
For some devices of the ecomatmobile controller family, additional diagnostic functions can be
activated for the inputs and outputs. So, the corresponding input and output signal can be monitored
and the application program can react in case of a fault.
Depending on the input and output, certain marginal conditions must be taken into account when
using the diagnosis:
• It must be checked by means of the data sheet if the device used has the described input and
output groups.
• Constants are predefined (e.g. IN_DIGITAL_H) in the device libraries (e.g.
ifm_CR0020_Vx.LIB) for the configuration of the inputs and outputs. For details → annex
(→ page 271).

4.2.1 Configure inputs

Digital inputs
Depending on the controller, the digital inputs can be configured differently. In addition to the
protective mechanisms against interference, the digital inputs are internally evaluated via an analogue
stage. This enables diagnosis of the input signals. But in the application software the switching signal
is directly available as bit information. For some of these inputs the potential can be selected.
UB

Digital Input Filter


Eingang / Input Spannung
Voltage

Figure: Block diagram high/low side input for negative and positive sensor signals

29
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Function configuration of the inputs and outputs

UB UB

Sensor

Sensor

GND GND

High side input for negative sensor signal Low side input for positive sensor signal

Fast inputs
In addition, the ecomatmobile controllers have up to 16 fast counter/pulse inputs for an input
frequency up to 50 kHz (→ data sheet). If, for example, mechanical switches are connected to these
inputs, there may be faulty signals in the controller due to contact bouncing. Using the application
software, these "faulty signals" must be filtered if necessary.
Furthermore it has to be noted whether the pulse inputs are designed for frequency measurement
(FRQx) and/or period measurement (CYLx) (→ data sheet).
The following functions, for example, can be used here:
On FRQx inputs:
• Frequency measurement with function FREQUENCY (→ page 201)
• Fast counter with function FAST_COUNT (→ page 212)
On CYLx inputs:
• Period measurement with function PERIOD (→ page 203) or with function PERIOD_RATIO
(→ page 205)
• Phase position of 2 fast inputs compared via the function PHASE (→ page 207)

Info
When using this function, the parameterised inputs and outputs are automatically configured, so the
programmer of the application does not have to do this.

30
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Function configuration of the inputs and outputs

Analogue inputs
The analogue inputs can be configured via the application program. The measuring range can be set
as follows:
• current input 0...20 mA
• voltage input 0...10 V
• voltage input 0...30 / 32 V
If in the operating mode "0...30 / 32 V" the supply voltage is read back, the measurement can also be
performed ratiometrically. This means potentiometers or joysticks can be evaluated without additional
reference voltage. A fluctuation of the supply voltage then has no influence on this measured value.
As an alternative, an analogue channel can also be evaluated digitally.

NOTE
In case of ratiometric measurement the connected sensors should be supplied via the same voltage
source as the controller. So, faulty measurements caused by offset voltage are avoided.
In case of digital evaluation the higher input resistance must be taken into account.

UB

Referenz-Spannung
Reference Voltage
Analog
Eingang / Input Input Filter Spannung
Voltage
Strommessung
Current measurement

0...10 / 32 V
Voltage measurement
Spannungsmessung

Figure: block diagram of the analogue inputs

Analogue inputs ANALOG4...7 (%IW6...%IW9)


These inputs are a group of analogue channels which can also be evaluated digitally.
The configuration can be carried out via the system variable I4_MODE...I7_MODE or, preferably, via
the function INPUT_ANALOG (→ page 248) (input MODE).
If the analogue inputs are configured for current measurement, the device switches to the safe voltage
measurement range (0...32V DC) and the corresponding error bit in the flag byte ERROR_Ix is set
when the final value (> 23 mA) is exceeded. When the value is again below the limit value, the input
automatically switches back to the current measurement range.

31
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Function configuration of the inputs and outputs

Digital input group I0...I3 (%IX0.0...%IX1.8)


These inputs are digital inputs with internal analogue evaluation for diagnosis. The configuration of the
diagnostic function is carried out via the system variables Ix_MODE. The diagnostic information is
indicated via the system flag bit ERROR_Ix. The system flag bit DIAGNOSE indicates wire break or
short circuit of the input signal as group error.
Figure: non-electronic switches

To monitor the input signals of non-


electronic switches, they must be
equipped with an additional resistor
connection.

Info
Sensors with diagnostic capabilities to NAMUR can be used on all inputs. In this case, no additional
resistor connection is required.

If the diagnostic function is active, the system variable ANALOG_0...ANALOG_3 with the voltage
values is available for each input channel on the input.

32
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Function configuration of the inputs and outputs

4.2.2 Configure outputs

Digital and PWM outputs


Three types of controller outputs can be distinguished:
• high side digital outputs with and without diagnostic function
• high side digital outputs with and without diagnostic function and additional PWM mode
• PWM outputs which can be operated with and without current control function. Current-controlled
PWM outputs are mainly used for triggering proportional hydraulic functions.

WARNING
Property damage or bodily injury due to malfunctions possible!
Outputs which are operated in the PWM mode do not support any diagnostic functions and no ERROR
flags are set. This is due to the structure of the outputs.
The function OUT_OVERLOAD_PROTECTION is not active in this mode!

NOTE
If an output is switched off in case of a fault (e.g. short circuit) via the hardware (by means of a fuse),
the logic state created by the application program does not change.
To set the outputs again after removal of the peripheral fault, the outputs must first be logically reset in
the application program and then set again if required.

Output group Q0...Q4 (%QX0.0...%QX1.8)


If the group Q0...Q4 is used as PWM outputs, the diagnosis is implemented via the integrated current
measurement channels which are also used for the current-controlled output functions. Using the
function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176) load currents ≥ 100 mA can be indicated.
This function can also be used for diagnosis when the outputs are used as digital channel (only for
load currents ≥ 100 mA).

33
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Configurations Hints to wiring diagrams

4.3 Hints to wiring diagrams


The wiring diagrams (→ installation instructions of the controllers, chapter "Wiring") show the standard
device configurations. The wiring diagrams help allocate the input and output channels to the IEC
addresses and the device terminals.

Examples:
12 GNDA
12 Terminal number
GNDA Terminal designation

30 %IX0.7 BL
30 Terminal number
%IX0.7 IEC address for a binary input
BL Hardware version of the input,
here: Binary Low side

47 %QX0.3 BH/PH
47 Terminal number
%QX0.3 IEC address for a binary output
BH/PH Hardware version of the output,
here: Binary High side or PWMHigh side

The different abbreviations have the following meaning:


A Analogue input
BH Binary input/output, high side
BL Binary input/output, low side
CYL Input period measurement
ENC Input encoder signals
FRQ Frequency input
H-bridge Output with H-bridge function
PWM Pulse-widthmodulated signal
PWMI PWM output with current measurement
IH Pulse/counter input, high side
IL Pulse/counter input, low side
R Read back channel for one output

Allocation of the input/output channels:


Depending on the device configuration there is one input and/or one output on a device terminal
(→ catalogue, installation instructions or data sheet of the corresponding device).

34
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Operating states and operating system Operating states

5 Operating states and operating system


Operating states ........................................................................................................................35
Status LED.................................................................................................................................36
Load the operating system ........................................................................................................37
Operating modes .......................................................................................................................37

5.1 Operating states


After power on the ecomatmobile controller can be in one of five possible operating states:

5.1.1 Reset
This state is passed through after every power on reset:
• The operating system is initialised.
• Various checks are carried out.
• This temporary state is replaced by the Run or Stop state.
> The LED lights orange for a short time.

5.1.2 Run state


This state is reached in the following cases:
• From the reset state (autostart)
• From the stop state by the Run command
- only for the operating mode = Test (→ chapter TEST mode, → page 38)

5.1.3 Stop state


This state is reached in the following cases:
• From the reset state if no program is loaded
• From the Run state if:
- the stop command is sent via the interface
- AND: operating mode = Test (→ chapter TEST mode, → page 38)

5.1.4 Fatal error


The ecomatmobile controller goes to this state if a non tolerable error was found. This state can only
be left by a reset.
> The LED lights red.

35
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Operating states and operating system Status LED

5.1.5 No operating system


No operating system was loaded, the controller is in the boot loading state. Before loading the
application software the operating system must be downloaded.
> The LED flashes green (quickly).

5.2 Status LED


The operating states are indicated by the integrated status LED (default setting).
LED colour Flashing Description
frequency
out permanently out no operating voltage
green 5 Hz no operating system loaded
green 2 Hz RUN state
green permanently on STOP state
red 2 Hz RUN state with error
red permanently on fatal error or stop with error
yellow/orange briefly on initialisation or reset checks

The operating states STOP and RUN can be changed by the programming system.
For this controller the status LED can also be set by the application program. To do so, the following
system variable is used:
LED_MODE flashing frequency from the data structure "LED_MODES"
allowed: LED_2HZ, LED_1HZ, LED_05HZ, LED_0HZ (permanently)

NOTE
If the flashing mode is changed by the application program, the above-mentioned table (default setting)
is no longer valid.

36
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Operating states and operating system Load the operating system

5.3 Load the operating system


On delivery of the ecomatmobile controller no operating system is normally loaded (LED flashes
green at 5 Hz). Only the boot loader is active in this operating mode. It provides the minimum functions
for loading the operating system (e.g. RS232, CAN).
Normally it is necessary to download the operating system only once. The application program can
then be loaded to the controller (also several times) without influencing the operating system.
Advantage:
• No EPROM replacement is necessary for an update of the operating system.
The operating system is provided with this documentation on a separate data carrier. In addition, the
current version can be downloaded from the website of ifm electronic gmbh at:
→ www.ifm.com > Select country/language > [Service] > [Download] > [Control systems]

NOTE:
The software versions suitable for the selected target must always be used:
• of the operating system (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.H86),
• of the PLC configuration (CRnnnn_Vxx.CFG),
• of the device library (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.LIB),
• and the further files (→ chapter Overview of the files and libraries used, → page 275)
CRnnnn device article number
Vxx: 00...99 target version number
yy: 00...99 release number
zz: 00...99 patch number
The basic file name (e.g. "CR0032") and the software version number "xx" (e.g. "02") must always have
the same value! Otherwise the controller goes to the STOP mode.
The values for "yy" (release number) and "zz" (patch number) do not have to match.

Also note: the following files must also be loaded:


• The for the project required internal libraries (designed in IEC1131),
• the configuration files (*.CFG)
• and the target files (*.TRG).
The operating system is transferred to the controller using the separate program "downloader". (The
downloader is on the ecomatmobile CD "Software, Tools and Documentation" or can be downloaded
from ifm's website, if necessary).
Normally the application program is loaded to the controller via the programming system. But it can
also be loaded using the downloader if it was first read from the controller (→ upload).

5.4 Operating modes


Independent of the operating states the ecomatmobile controller can be operated in different modes.
The corresponding control bits can be set and reset with the programming software CoDeSys
(window: Global Variables) via the application software or in test mode (→ chapter TEST mode,
→ page 38).

37
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Operating states and operating system Operating modes

5.4.1 TEST mode


This operating mode is achieved by applying a high level (supply voltage) to the test input
(→ installation instructions, chapter "wiring"). The ecomatmobile controller can now receive
commands via one of the interfaces in the RUN or STOP mode and, for example, communicate with
the programming system. Moreover the software can only be downloaded to the controller in this
operating state.
The state of the application program can be queried via the flag TEST.

NOTICE
Loss of the stored software possible!
In the test mode there is no protection of the stored operating system and application software.

Note for the following controllers:


• SmartController CR2500
• CabinetController CR0301, CR0302
• PCB controller CS0015:

NOTICE
Destruction of the EEPROM possible!
The test input must not be activated permanently because otherwise the allowed write cycles are
exceeded in the EEPROM.

5.4.2 SERIAL_MODE
The serial interface is available for the exchange of data in the application. Debugging the application
software is then only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or
via USB.
This function is switched off as standard (FALSE). Via the flag SERIAL_MODE the state can be
controlled and queried via the application program or the programming system.
→ chapter Use of the serial interface (→ page 239)

5.4.3 DEBUG mode


If the input DEBUG of the function SET_DEBUG (→ page 223) is set to TRUE, the programming
system or the downloader, for example, can communicate with the controller and execute system
commands (e.g. for service functions via the GSM modem CANremote).
In this operating mode a software download is not possible because the test input (→ chapter TEST
mode, → page 38) is not connected to supply voltage.

38
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Error codes and diagnostic information Operating modes

6 Error codes and diagnostic information


Response to the system error ...................................................................................................40

To ensure maximum operational reliability the operating system checks the ecomatmobile controller
in the start phase (reset phase) and during the program execution by internal error checks.
The following error flags are set in case of an error:
Error Description
CANx_BUSOFF CAN interface x: Interface is not on the bus
CANx_LASTERROR ¹) CAN interface x: Error number of the last CAN transmission:
0= no error
≠0 → CAN specification → LEC
CANx_WARNING CAN interface x: Warning threshold reached (> 96)
ERROR ³) Set ERROR bit / switch off the relay *)
ERROR_MEMORY Memory error
ERROR_POWER Undervoltage/overvoltage error
ERROR_TEMPERATURE Excessive temperature error (> 85 °C)
ERROR_VBBR Terminal voltage error VBBR
CANx stands for the number of the CAN interface (CAN 1...x, depending on the device).
¹) Access to this flags requires detailed knowledge of the CAN controller and is normally not required.
²) Flag NOT available for CR2500, CR0301, CR0302.
³) By setting the ERROR system flag the ERROR output (terminal 13) is set to FALSE. In the "error-
free state" the output ERROR = TRUE (negative logic).
*) Relay NOT available for CR2500 and CR030n.

The following diagnostic messages are only available for devices with periphery terminals:
Diagnostic message Type Description
(only devices with periphery connections)
ERROR_BREAK_Qx *) BYTE Wire break error on the output group x
ERROR_Ix BYTE Peripheral error on the input group x
ERROR_SHORT_Qx *) BYTE Short circuit error on the output group x
x stands for the input/output group x (word 0...x, depending on the device).
*) Flags only available for ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController.

NOTE
In adverse cases the output transistor can already switch off a disturbed output before the operating
system could detect the error. The corresponding error flag is then NOT set.
We recommend that the application programmer (additionally) evaluates the error by reading back the
outputs.

39
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Error codes and diagnostic information Response to the system error

Complete list of the device-specific error codes and diagnostic messages


→ chapter system flags (→ page 274).

6.1 Response to the system error


In principle, the programmer is responsible to react to the error flags (system flags) in the application
program.
The specific error bits and bytes should be processed in the application program. An error description
is provided via the error flag. These error bits/bytes can be further processed if necessary.
In principle, all error flags must be reset by the application program. Without explicit reset of the error
flags the flags remain set with the corresponding effect on the application program.
In case of serious errors the system flag bit ERROR can also be set. At the same time this also has
the effect that the operation LED (if available) lights red, the ERROR output is set to FALSE and the
monitoring relays (if available) are de-energised. So the outputs protected via these relays are
switched off.

6.1.1 Notes on devices with monitoring relay


Only available for the following controllers:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
Using the logic function via the system flag RELAIS or RELAIS_CLAMP_15 (→ chapter Latching) all
other outputs are also switched off.
Depending on the application it must now be decided whether by resetting the system flag bit ERROR
the relay – and so also the outputs – may be switched on again.
In addition it is also possible to set the system flag bit ERROR as "defined error" by the application
program.

NOTICE
Premature wear of the relay contacts possible.
► Only use this function for a general switch-off of the outputs in case of an "emergency".
► In normal operation switch off the relays only without load!
To do so, first switch off the outputs via the application program!

40
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Error codes and diagnostic information Response to the system error

6.1.2 Example process for response to a system error


The system determines an excessive temperature in the controller.
The operating system sets the error bit ERROR_TEMPERATURE.
The application program recognises this state by querying the corresponding bits.
> The application program switches off outputs.
If necessary, the error bit ERROR can be set additionally via the application program.
> Consequences:
- operation LED flashes red
- safety relay is de-energised
- supply voltage of all outputs is switched off
- level of the output ERROR*) is LOW
► Rectify the cause of the error.
> The operating system resets the error bit ERROR_TEMPERATURE.
► If set, the error bit ERROR must be deleted via the application program.
> The relay is energised again and the LED flashes green again.
*) Output not available for CR0301, CR0302, CS0015.

41
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Programming and system resources Above-average stress

7 Programming and system resources


Above-average stress................................................................................................................42
Limits of the SmartController .....................................................................................................43
Watchdog behaviour..................................................................................................................44
Available memory ......................................................................................................................44
Program creation and download in the PLC..............................................................................45

For the programmable devices from the controller family ecomatmobile numerous functions are
available which enable use of the devices in a wide range of applications.
As these functions use more or fewer system resources depending on their complexity it is not always
possible to use all functions at the same time and several times.

NOTICE
Risk that the controller acts too slowly! Cycle time must not become too long!
► When designing the application program the above-mentioned recommendations must be complied
with and tested. If necessary, the cycle time must be optimised by restructuring the software and
the system set-up.

It must also be taken into account which CPU is used in the device.
Controller family Article no. CPU frequency [MHz]
ClassicController (16 bits) CR0020 40
CR0505
ExtendedController (16 bits) CR0200 40
CabinetController CR0301 20
CR0302
CabinetController CR0303 40
SmartController CR2500 20
ClassicController (32 bits) CR0032 150
ExtendedController (32 bits) CR0232 150
SafetyController (16 bits) CR7020, CR7021 40
CR7200, CR7201
CR7505; CR7506
The higher the CPU frequency, the higher the performance when complex functions are used at the
same time.

7.1 Above-average stress


The following functions, for example, utilise the system resources above average:
Function Above average load
CYCLE, Use of several measuring channels with a high input frequency
PERIOD,
PERIOD_RATIO,
PHASE

42
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Programming and system resources Limits of the SmartController

Function Above average load


OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL, Simultaneous use of several current controllers
OCC_TASK
CAN interface High baud rate (> 250 kbits) with a high bus load
PWM, Many PWM channels at the same time. In particular the
PWM1000 channels as from 4 are much more time critical
INC_ENCODER Many encoder channels at the same time
The functions listed above as examples trigger system interrupts. This means: Each activation
prolongs the cycle time of the application program.
The following indications should be seen as reference values:

7.2 Limits of the SmartController


Current controller max. 1 If possible, do not use any other
performance-affecting functions
CYCLE, 1 channel Input frequency < 5 kHz
PERIOD,
PERIOD_RATIO, 4 channels Input frequency < 1 kHz
PHASE
INC_ENCODER max. 2 If possible, do not use any other
performance-affecting functions!

ATTENTION
Risk that the controller works too slowly! Cycle time must not become too long!
► When the application program is designed the above-mentioned recommendations must be
complied with and tested. If necessary, the cycle time must be optimised by restructuring the
software and the system set-up.

43
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Programming and system resources Watchdog behaviour

7.3 Watchdog behaviour


For all ecomatmobile controllers the program runtime is monitored by a watchdog. If the maximum
watchdog time is exceeded, the controller carries out a reset and starts again (SafetyController:
controller remains in the reset; LED goes out).
Depending on the hardware the individual controllers have a different time behaviour:
Controller Watchdog [ms]
ClassicController 100
ExtendedController 100
SmartController 100…200
SafetyController 100
CabinetController 100…200
PCB controller 100…200
PDM360 smart 100…200
PDM360 compact no watchdog
PDM360 no watchdog

7.4 Available memory


Physical Physically existing FLASH memory (non-volatile, slow memory) 512 Kbytes
memory
Physically existing RAM (volatile, fast memory) 256 Kbytes
Physically existing EEPROM (non-volatile, slow memory) 4 Kbytes
Physically existing FRAM (non-volatile, fast memory) ---
Use of the Memory reserved for the code of the IEC application 192 Kbytes
FLASH
memory Memory for data other than the IEC application that can be written by the user such as 48 Kbytes
files, bitmaps, fonts
Memory for data other than the IEC application that can be processed by the user by 16 Kbytes
means of functions such as FLASHREAD, FLASHWRITE
RAM Memory for the data in the RAM reserved for the IEC application 48 Kbytes
Remanent Memory for the data declared as VAR_RETAIN in the IEC application 256 bytes
memory
Memory for the flags agreed as RETAIN in the IEC application 512 Kbytes
Remanent memory freely available to the user. Access is made via the functions 256 Kbytes
FRAMREAD, FRAMWRITE, E2READ, E2WRITE.
FRAM freely available to the user. Access is made via the address operator. 4 Kbytes

44
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Programming and system resources Program creation and download in the PLC

7.5 Program creation and download in the PLC


The application program is generated by the CoDeSys programming system and loaded in the
controller several times during the program development for testing:
In CoDeSys: [Online] > [Write file in the controller].
For each such download via CoDeSys the source code is translated again. The result is that each time
a new checksum is formed in the controller memory. This process is also permissible for safety
controllers until the release of the software.
At least for safety-related applications the software and its checksum have to be identical for the series
production of the machine.
Programmieren in CoDeSys
Programming in CoDeSys

[Projekt] > [Alles übersetzen]


[Project] > [Compile all]

nein fehlerfrei?
no no errors?
Nur wenn Sicherheits-Software:
Only if safety software:
ja
yes

[Online] > [Einloggen] Quellcode + Dokumentation


[Online] > [Login] Source code + documentation

[Online] > [Bootprojekt erzeugen] Prüfen und Zertifizieren


[Online] > [Create boot project] Verify and certify

[Online] > [Datei in Steuerung schreiben]


[Online] > [Write file to PLC]

R360 Controller / PDM360


PDM360 compact / PDM360 smart

Im Speicher ergänzt mit CRC


In the memory added with CRC

Applikation testen
R360
R360/ /PDM360 smart
Test application R360
R360 /PDM360
/PDM360
smart
PDM360smart
smart smart
R360 Controller / PDM360

nein Test in Ordnung?


no Test okay?
ja ...
yes

Downloader: Projekt auslesen Downloader: Projekt in SPS schreiben


Downloader: Read project Downloader: Write project to PLC

Datei.H86 (mit CRC)


File.H86 (with CRC)

Graphics: Creation and distribution of the (certified) software

45
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Programming and system resources Program creation and download in the PLC

ifm downloader
The ifm downloader serves for easy transfer of the program code from the programming station to the
controller. As a matter of principle each application software can be copied to the controllers using the
ifm downloader. Advantage: A programming system with CoDeSys licence is not required.
Safety-related application software MUST be copied to the controllers using the ifm downloader so as
not to falsify the checksum by which the software has been identified.

NOTE
The ifm downloader cannot be used for the following devices:
- PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060,
- PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056.

Certification and distribution of the safety-related software


Only safety-related application software must be certified before it is copied to the series machine and
used.
• Saving the approved software
After completion of program development and approval of the entire system by the responsible
certification body (e.g. TÜV, BiA) the latest version of the application program loaded in the
controller using the ifm downloader has to be read from the controller and saved on a data carrier
using the name name_of the_project file.H86. Only this process ensures that the
application software and its checksums are stored.
• Download of the approved software.
To equip all machines of a series production with an identical software only this file may be loaded
in the controllers using the ifm downloader.
• An error in the data of this file is automatically recognised by the integrated checksum when
loaded again using the ifm downloader.

Changing the safety-relevant software after certification


Changes to the application software using the CoDeSys programming system automatically create a
new application file which may only be copied to the safety-related controllers after a new certification.
To do so, follow again the process described above!
Under the following conditions the new certification may not be necessary:
• a new risk assessment was made for the change,
• NO safety-related elements were changed, added or removed,
• the change was correctly documented.

46
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller General about CAN

8 CAN in the ecomatmobile controller


General about CAN ...................................................................................................................47
Exchange of CAN data ..............................................................................................................49
Physical connection of CAN ......................................................................................................51
Software for CAN and CANopen ...............................................................................................55
CAN errors and error handling ..................................................................................................55
Description of the CAN functions...............................................................................................58
ifm CANopen library...................................................................................................................83
Summary CAN / CANopen ..................................................................................................... 144
Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939 ............................................................................... 145

8.1 General about CAN


The CAN bus (Controller Area Network) belongs to the fieldbuses.
It is an asynchronous serial bus system which was developed for the networking of control devices in
automotives by Bosch in 1983 and presented together with Intel in 1985 to reduce cable harnesses
(up to 2 km per vehicle) thus saving weight.

8.1.1 Topology
The CAN network is set up in a line structure. A limited number of spurs is allowed. Moreover, a ring
type bus (infotainment area) and a star type bus (central locking) are possible. Compared to the line
type bus both variants have one disadvantage:
In the ring type bus all control devices are connected in series so that the complete bus fails if one
control device fails.
The star type bus is mostly controlled by a central processor as all information must flow through this
processor. Consequently no information can be transferred if the central processor fails. If an
individual control device fails, the bus continues to function.
The linear bus has the advantage that all control devices are in parallel of a central cable. Only if this
fails, the bus no longer functions.
The disadvantage of spurs and star-type bus is that the wave resistance is difficult to determine. In the
worst case the bus no longer functions.
For a high-speed bus (> 125 kbits/s) 2 terminating resistors of 120 Ω (between CAN_HIGH and
CAN_LOW) must additionally be used at the cable ends.

47
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller General about CAN

8.1.2 CAN interfaces


The controllers have several CAN interfaces depending on the hardware structure. In principle, all
interfaces can be used with the following functions independently of each other:
• CAN at level 2 (layer 2)
• CANopen (→ page 83) protocol to CiA 301/401 for master/slave operation (via CoDeSys)
• CAN Network variables (→ page 108) (via CoDeSys)
• Protocol SAE J1939 (→ page 145) (for engine management)
• Bus load detection
• Error frame counter
• Download interface
• 100 % bus load without package loss
Which CAN interface of the device has which potential, → datasheet of the device.

Informative: more interesting CAN protocols:


• "Truck & Trailer Interface" to ISO 11992 (only available for SmartController CR2051)
• ISOBUS to ISO 11783 for agricultural machines
• NMEA 2000 for maritime applications
• CANopen truck gateway to CiA 413 (conversion between ISO 11992 and SAE J1939)

8.1.3 System configuration


The controllers are delivered with the download identifier 127. The download system uses this
identifier (= ID) for the first communication with a non configured module via CAN. The download ID
can be set via the PLC browser of the programming system, the downloader or the application
program.
As the download mechanism works on the basis of the CANopen SDO service (even if the controller is
not operated in the CANopen mode) all controllers in the network must have a unique identifier. The
actual COB IDs are derived from the module numbers according to the "predefined connection set".
Only one non configured module is allowed to be connected to the network at a time. After assignment
of the new participant number 1...126, a download or debugging can be carried out and then another
device can be connected to the system.
The download ID is set irrespective of the CANopen identifier. Ensure that these IDs do not overlap
with the download IDs or the CANopen node numbers of the other controllers or network participants.
Controller program download CANopen
ID COB ID SDO Node ID COB ID SDO
1…127 TX: 58016 + download ID 1…127 TX: 58016 + node ID
RX: 60016 + download ID RX: 60016 + node ID

NOTE
The CAN download ID of the device must match the CAN download ID set in CoDeSys!
In the CAN network the CAN download IDs must be unique!

48
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Exchange of CAN data

8.2 Exchange of CAN data


CAN data is exchanged via the CAN protocol of the link layer (level 2) of the seven-layer ISO/OSI
reference model specified in the international standard ISO 11898.
Every bus participant can transmit messages (multimaster capability). The exchange of data functions
similarly to radio. Data is transferred on the bus without transmitter or address. The data is only
marked by the identifier. It is the task of every participant to receive the transmitted data and to check
by means of the identifier whether the data is relevant for this participant. This procedure is carried out
automatically by the CAN controller together with the operating system.
For the normal exchange of CAN data the programmer only has to make the data objects with their
identifiers known to the system when designing the software. This is done via the following functions:
• function CANx_RECEIVE (→ page 73) (receive CAN data) and
• function CANx_TRANSMIT (→ page 71) (transmit CAN data).
Using these functions the following units are combined into a data object:
• RAM address of the useful data,
• data type,
• selected identifier (ID).
These data objects participate in the exchange of data via the CAN bus. The transmit and receive
objects can be defined from all valid IEC data types (e.g. BOOL, WORD, INT, ARRAY).
The CAN message consists of a CAN identifier (CAN-ID, → page 49) and maximum 8 data bytes. The
ID does not represent the transmit or receive module but identifies the message. To transmit data it is
necessary that a transmit object is declared in the transmit module and a receive object in at least one
other module. Both declarations must be assigned to the same identifier.

8.2.1 CAN-ID
Depending of the CAN-ID the following CAN identifiers are free available for the data transfer:
CAN-ID base CAN-ID extended
11 bits 29 bits
2 047 CAN identifiers 536 870 912 CAN identifiers
Motor management (SAE J1939),
Standard applications
Truck & Trailer interface (ISO 11992)

NOTE
In some devices the 29 bits CAN-ID is not available for all CAN interfaces, → datasheet.

49
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Exchange of CAN data

Example 11 bits CAN-ID (base):


S CAN-ID base R I
O T D
F Bit 28 ... Bit 18 R E
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
0 7 F

Example 29 bits CAN-ID (extended):


S CAN-ID base S I CAN-ID extended R
O R D T
F Bit 28 ... Bit 18 R E Bit 17 ... Bit 0 R
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 F C 0 0 0 0

Legend:
SOF = Start of frame
Edge of recessive to dominant
RTR = Remote transmission request
dominant: This message sends data
recessive: This message requests data
IDE = Identifier extension flag
dominant: After this control bits follows
recessive: After this the second part of the 29 bits identifier follows
SRR = Substitute remote request
recessive: Extended CAN-ID: Replaces the RTR bit at this position

8.2.2 Data reception


In principle the received data objects are automatically stored in a buffer (i.e. without influence of the
user).
Each identifier has such a buffer (queue). Depending on the application software this buffer is emptied
according to the FIFO principle (First In, First Out) via the function CANx_RECEIVE (→ page 73).

8.2.3 Data transmission


By calling the function CANx_TRANSMIT (→ page 71) the application program transfers exactly one
CAN message to the CAN controller. As feedback you are informed whether the message was
successfully transferred to the CAN controller. Which then automatically carries out the actual transfer
of the data on the CAN bus.
The transmit order is rejected if the controller is not ready because it is in the process of transferring a
data object. The transmit order must then be repeated by the application program. This information is
indicated by a bit.
If several CAN messages are ready for transmission, the message with the lowest ID is transmitted
first. Therefore, the programmer must assign the CAN ID (→ page 49) very carefully.

50
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Physical connection of CAN

8.3 Physical connection of CAN


The mechanisms of the data transmission and error handling described in the chapters Exchange of
CAN data (→ page 49) and CAN errors (→ page 55) are directly implemented in the CAN controller.
ISO 11898 describes the physical connection of the individual CAN participants in layer 1.

8.3.1 Network structure


The ISO 11898 standard assumes a line structure of the CAN network.

Figure: network structure

NOTE
The line must be terminated at its two ends using a terminating resistor of 120 Ω to prevent corruption
of the signal quality.
The devices of ifm electronic equipped with a CAN interface have no terminating resistors.

Spurs
Ideally no spur should lead to the bus participants (node 1 ... node n) because reflections occur
depending on the total cable length and the time-related processes on the bus. To avoid system
errors, spurs to a bus participant (e.g. I/O module) should not exceed a certain length. 2 m spurs
(referred to 125 kbits/s) are considered to be uncritical. The sum of all spurs in the whole system
should not exceed 30 m. In special cases the cable lengths of the line and spurs must be calculated
exactly.

51
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Physical connection of CAN

8.3.2 Bus level


The CAN bus is in the inactive (recessive) state if the output transistor pairs are switched off in all bus
participants. If at least one transistor pair is switched on, a bit is transferred to the bus. This activates
the bus (dominant). A current flows through the terminating resistors and generates a difference
voltage between the two bus cables. The recessive and dominant states are converted into voltages in
the bus nodes and detected by the receiver circuits.
U

5V

CAN_H
3,5 V

2,5 V

1,5 V
CAN_L

0V
rezessiv dominant rezessiv t
recessive dominant recessive

Figure: bus level

This differential transmission with common return considerably improves the transmission security.
Noise voltages which interfere with the system externally or shifts of the ground potential influence
both signal cables with the same interference. These influences are therefore not considered when the
difference is formed in the receiver.

52
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Physical connection of CAN

8.3.3 Bus cable length


The length of the bus cable depends on:
• type of the bus cable (cable, connector),
• cable resistance,
• required transmission rate (baud rate),
• length of the spurs.
To simplify matters, the following dependence between bus length and baud rate can be assumed:
Baudrate
Baud rate
[kBit/s]
1000

500

200

100

50

20

10
Bus-Länge
5 Bus length
0 10 50 1000 10000 [m]

Figure: bus cable length

Baud rate [kBit/s] Bus length [m] Bit length nominal [µs]
1 000 30 1
800 50 1.25
500 100 2
250 250 4
125 500 8
62.5 1 000 20
20 2 500 50
10 5 000 100
Table: Dependencies bus length / baud rate / bit time

NOTE
These declarations apply to CAN layer 2.
Other CAN protocols (e.g. SAE J1939 or ISO 11992) have other requirements!

53
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Physical connection of CAN

8.3.4 Wire cross-sections


For the layout of the CAN network the wire cross-section of the bus cable used must also be taken into
account. The following table describes the dependence of the wire cross-section referred to the cable
length and the number of the connected nodes.
Wire cross-section at Wire cross-section at Wire cross-section at
Cable length [m]
32 nodes [mm2] 64 nodes [mm2] 100 nodes [mm2]
< 100 0.25 0.25 0.25
< 250 0.34 0.50 0.50
< 500 0.75 0.75 1.00
Depending on the EMC requirements the bus cables can be laid out as follows:
• in parallel,
• as twisted pair
• and/or shielded.

54
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Software for CAN and CANopen

8.4 Software for CAN and CANopen


In principle, ecomatmobile controllers can directly participate in the CAN communication (layer 2) by
using the functions CANx_TRANSMIT and CANx_RECEIVE. In the operating mode CANopen the
programmer is provided with the defined services from the programming system CoDeSys.
The following points must be considered:
• In the operating mode CAN layer 2 the programmer is responsible for all services. The controller is
in this state after the following events:
- after a program download or
- after a reset command by the programming system
• The operating mode CANopen is activated by integrating the CoDeSys CANopen system libraries
(activate functions in the target settings). Depending on the selected function the controller
operates as CANopen master or slave (→ from chapter ifm CANopen library, → page 83).

8.5 CAN errors and error handling


The error mechanisms described are automatically processed by the CAN controller integrated in the
controller. This cannot be influenced by the user. (Depending on the application) the user should react
to signalled errors in the application software.
Goal of the CAN error mechanisms:
• Ensuring uniform data objects in the complete CAN network
• Permanent functionality of the network even in case of a faulty CAN participant
• Differentiation between temporary and permanent disturbance of a CAN participant
• Localisation and self-deactivation of a faulty participant in 2 steps:
- error passive
- disconnection from the bus (bus off)
This gives a temporarily disturbed participant a "rest".
To give the interested user an overview of the behaviour of the CAN controller in case of an error,
error handling is easily described below. After error detection the information is automatically prepared
and made available to the programmer as CAN error bits in the application software.

8.5.1 Error message


If a bus participant detects an error condition, it immediately transmits an error flag. The transmission
is then aborted or the correct messages already received by other participants are rejected. This
ensures that correct and uniform data is available to all participants. Since the error flag is directly
transmitted the sender can immediately start to repeat the disturbed message as opposed to other
fieldbus systems (they wait until a defined acknowledgement time has elapsed). This is one of the
most important features of CAN.
One of the basic problems of serial data transmission is that a permanently disturbed or faulty bus
participant can block the complete system. Error handling for CAN would increase such a risk. To
exclude this, a mechanism is required which detects the fault of a participant and disconnects this
participant from the bus, if necessary.

55
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller CAN errors and error handling

8.5.2 Error counter


A transmit and receive error counter are integrated in the CAN controller. They are counted up
(incremented) for every faulty transmit or receive operation. If a transmission was correct, these
counters are counted down (decremented).
However, the error counters are more incremented in case of an error than decremented in case of
success. Over a defined period this can lead to a considerable increase of the counts even if the
number of the undisturbed messages is greater than the number of the disturbed messages. Longer
undisturbed periods slowly reduce the counts. So the counts indicate the relative frequency of
disturbed messages.
If the participant itself is the first to detect errors (= self-inflicted errors), the error is more severely
"punished" for this participant than for other bus participants. To do so, the counter is incremented by
a higher amount.
If the count of a participant exceeds a defined value, it can be assumed that this participant is faulty.
To prevent this participant from disturbing bus communication by active error messages (error active),
it is switched to "error passive".
CAN Restart error active
error CAN Neustart
active → participant, error active (→ page 56)
error passive
REC > 127 REC < 128
→ participant, error passive (→ page 56)
or TEC > 127 and TEC < 128
bus off
→ participant, bus off (→ page 57)
error
bus off CAN restart
passive TEC > 255
→ participant, bus off (→ page 57)
REC = Receive error counter / Zähler Empfangsfehler
TEC = Transmit error counter / Zähler Sendefehler

Figure: mechanism of the error counter

8.5.3 Participant, error active


An error active participant participates in the bus communication without restriction and is allowed to
signal detected errors by transmitting the active error flag. As already described the transmitted
message is destroyed.

8.5.4 Participant, error passive


An error passive participant can also communicate without restriction. However, it is only allowed to
identify a detected error by a passive error flag, which does not interfere with the bus communication.
An error passive participant becomes error active again if it is below a defined count value.
To inform the user about incrementing of the error counter, the system variable CANx_WARNING is
set if the value of the error counter is > 96. In this state the participant is still error active.

56
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller CAN errors and error handling

8.5.5 Participant, bus off


If the error count value continues to be incremented, the participant is disconnected from the bus (bus
off) after exceeding a maximum count value.
To indicate this state the flag CANx_BUSOFF is set in the application program.

NOTE
The error CANx_BUSOFF is automatically handled and reset by the operating system. If the error is to
be handled or evaluated more precisely via the application program, the function
CANx_ERRORHANDLER (→ page 80) must be used. The error CANx_BUSOFF must then be reset
explicitly by the application program.

57
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6 Description of the CAN functions


The CAN functions are described for use in the application program.

NOTE
To use the full capacity of CAN it is absolutely necessary for the programmer to define an exact bus
concept before starting to work:
• How many data objects are needed with what identifiers?
• How is the ecomatmobile controller to react to possible CAN errors?
• How often must data be transmitted? The functions CANx_TRANSMIT and CANx_RECEIVE must
be called accordingly.
→ chapter function CANx_TRANSMIT (→ page 71) and function CANx_RECEIVE (→ page 73)
► Check whether the transmit orders were successfully assigned to CANx_TRANSMIT (FB output
RESULT) or ensure that the received data is read from the data buffer of the queue using
CANx_RECEIVE and processed in the rest of the program immediately.

To be able to set up a communication connection, the same transmission rate (baud rate) must first be
set for all participants of the CAN network. For the controller this is done using the function
CAN1_BAUDRATE (→ page 58) (for the 1st CAN interface) or via the function CAN2 (→ page 69) (for
the 2nd CAN interface).
Irrespective of whether the devices support one or several CAN interfaces the functions related to the
interface are specified by a number in the CAN function (e.g. CAN1_TRANSMIT or CAN2_RECEIVE).
To simplify matters the designation (e.g. CANx_TRANSMIT) is used for all variants in the
documentation.

NOTE
When installing the ecomatmobile CD "Software, Tools and Documentation", projects with templates
have been stored in the program directory of your PC:
…\ifm electronic\CoDeSys V…\Projects\Template_CDVxxyyzz
► Open the requested template in CoDeSys via:
[File] > [New from template…]
> CoDeSys creates a new project which shows the basic program structure. It is strongly
recommended to follow the shown procedure.
→ chapter Set up programming system via templates (→ page 16)

In this example data objects are exchanged with other CAN participants via the identifiers 1 and 2. To
do so, a receive identifier must exist for the transmit identifier (or vice versa) in the other participant.

58
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.1 Function CAN1_BAUDRATE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CAN1_BAUDRATE
ENABLE
BAUDRATE

Description
CAN1_BAUDRATE sets the transmission rate for the bus participant.
Using this function, the transmission rate for the controller is set. To do so, the corresponding value in
kbits/s is entered at the function input BAUDRATE. After executing the function the new value is
stored in the device and will even be available after a power failure.

ATTENTION
Please note for CR2500, CR0301, CR0302 and CS0015:
The EEPROM memory module may be destroyed by the permanent use of this function!
► Only carry out the function once during initialisation in the first program cycle!
Afterwards block the function again (ENABLE = "FALSE")!

NOTE
The new baud rate will become effective on RESET (voltage OFF/ON or soft reset).
ExtendedController: In the slave module, the new baud rate will become effective after voltage
OFF/ON.

59
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
BAUDRATE WORD Baud rate [kbits/s]
Permissible values: 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 1000
Preset value = 125 kbits/s

60
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.2 Function CAN1_DOWNLOADID


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CAN1_DOWNLOADID
ENABLE
ID

Description
CAN1_DOWNLOADID sets the download identifier for the first CAN interface.
Using the function the communication identifier for the program download and for debugging can be
set. The new value is entered when the function input ENABLE is set to TRUE. The new download ID
will become effective after voltage OFF/ON or after a soft reset.

ATTENTION
Please note for CR2500, CR0301, CR0302 and CS0015:
The EEPROM memory module may be destroyed by the permanent use of this function!
► Only carry out the function once during initialisation in the first program cycle!
Afterwards block the function again (ENABLE = "FALSE")!

NOTE
Make sure that a different download ID is entered for each controller in the same network!
If the controller is operated in the CANopen network, the download ID must not coincide with any
module ID (node number) of the other participants, either!
ExtendedController: In the slave module the download ID becomes effective after voltage OFF/ON.

61
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
ID is set
FALSE: function is not executed
ID BYTE Download identifier
Permissible values: 1…127

62
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.3 Function CAN1_EXT


Contained in the library:
ifm_CAN1_EXT_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CAN1_EXT
ENABLE
START
EXTENDED_MODE
BAUDRATE

Description
The function CAN1_EXT initialises the first CAN interface for the extended identifier (29 bits).
The function has to be retrieved if the first CAN interface e.g. with the function libraries for SAE J1939
(→ page 145) is to be used.
A change of the baud rate will become effective after voltage OFF/ON. The baud rates of CAN 1 and
CAN 2 can be set differently.
The input START is only set for one cycle during reboot or restart of the interface.

NOTE
The function must be executed before the functions CAN1_EXT_... .

63
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: Function is executed
FALSE: Function is not executed
START BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
interface is initialised
FALSE: Initialisation cycle completed
EXTENDED_MODE BOOL TRUE: Identifier of the 1st CAN interface operates with
29 bits
FALSE: Identifier of the 1st CAN interface operates with
11 bits
BAUDRATE WORD Baud rate [kbits/s]
Permissible values = 50, 100, 125, 250, 500, 1000
Preset value = 125 kbits/s

64
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.4 Function CAN1_EXT_TRANSMIT


Contained in the library:
ifm_CAN1_EXT_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CAN1_EXT_TRANSMIT
ID RESULT
DLC
DATA
ENABLE

Description
CAN1_EXT_TRANSMIT transfers a CAN data object (message) to the CAN controller for
transmission.
The function is called for each data object in the program cycle; this is done several times in case of
long program cycles. The programmer must ensure by evaluating the function block output RESULT
that his transmit order was accepted. To put it simply, at 125 kbits/s one transmit order can be
executed per 1 ms.
The execution of the function can be temporarily blocked via the input ENABLE (ENABLE = FALSE).
This can, for example, prevent a bus overload.
Several data objects can be transmitted virtually at the same time if a flag is assigned to each data
object and controls the execution of the function via the ENABLE input.

NOTE
If this function is to be used, the 1st CAN interface must first be initialised for the extended ID with the
function CAN1_EXT (→ page 63).

65
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ID DWORD Number of the data object identifier
Permissible values: 11-bit ID = 0...2 047,
29-bit ID = 0...536 870 911
DLC BYTE Number of bytes to be transmitted from the array DATA
Permissible values = 0...8
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF BYTE The array contains max. 8 data bytes
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: Function is executed
FALSE: Function is not executed

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
the function has accepted the transmit order

66
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.5 Function CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CAN1_EXT_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE
CONFIG DATA
CLEAR DLC
ID RTR
AVAILABLE
OVERFLOW

Description
CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE configures a data receive object and reads the receive buffer of the data
object.
The function must be called once for each data object during initialisation to inform the CAN controller
about the identifiers of the data objects.
In the further program cycle CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE is called for reading the corresponding receive
buffer, this is done several times in case of long program cycles The programmer must ensure by
evaluating the byte AVAILABLE that newly received data objects are retrieved from the buffer and
further processed.
Each call of the function decrements the byte AVAILABLE by 1. If the value of AVAILABLE is 0, there
is no data in the buffer.
By evaluating the output OVERFLOW, an overflow of the data buffer can be detected. If
OVERFLOW = TRUE at least 1 data object has been lost.

NOTE
If this function is to be used, the 1st CAN interface must first be initialised for the extended ID with the
function CAN1_EXT (→ page 63).

67
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
Configure data object
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR BOOL TRUE: deletes the data buffer (queue)
ID WORD Number of the data object identifier
Permissible values normal frame = 0...2 047 (211)
Permissible values extended frame = 0...536 870 912 (229)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF The array contains a maximum of 8 data bytes.
BYTES
DLC BYTE Number of bytes transmitted in the array DATA.
Possible values = 0...8.
RTR BOOL Not supported
AVAILABLE BYTE Number of received messages
OVERFLOW BOOL TRUE: Overflow of the data buffer → loss of data!
FALSE: buffer not yet full

68
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.6 Function CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER


Contained in the library:
ifm_CAN1_EXT_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER
BUSOFF_RECOVER

Description
Error routine for monitoring the first CAN interface.
The function CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER monitors the first CAN interface and evaluates the CAN
errors. If a certain number of transmission errors occurs, the CAN participant becomes error passive. If
the error frequency decreases, the participant becomes error active again (= normal condition).
If a participant already is error passive and still transmission errors occur, it is disconnected from the
bus (= bus off) and the error bit CANx_BUSOFF is set. Returning to the bus is only possible if the "bus
off" condition has been removed (signal BUSOFF_RECOVER).
Afterwards, the error bit CANx_BUSOFF must be reset in the application program.

NOTE
If the automatic bus recover function is to be used (default setting) the function
CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER must not be integrated and instanced in the program!

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
BUSOFF_RECOVER BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
> Reboot of the CAN interface x
> Remedy "bus off" status
FALSE: function is not executed

69
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.7 Function CAN2


(can only be used for devices with a 2nd CAN interface)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CAN2
ENABLE
START
EXTENDED_MODE
BAUDRATE

Description
The function CAN2 initialises the 2nd CAN interface.
The function must be called if the 2nd CAN interface is to be used.
A change of the baud rate will become effective after voltage OFF/ON. The baud rates of CAN 1 and
CAN 2 can be set differently.
The input START is only set for one cycle during reboot or restart of the interface.
For the 2nd CAN interface the function libraries for SAE J1939 (→ page 145), among others, are
available.

NOTE
The function must be executed before the functions CAN2_... .

70
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
START BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
interface is initialised
FALSE: initialisation cycle completed
EXTENDED_MODE BOOL TRUE: identifier of the 2nd CAN interface operates with
29 bits
FALSE: identifier of the 2nd CAN interface operates with
11 bits
BAUDRATE WORD Baud rate [kbits/s]
Permissible values: 50, 100,125, 250, 500, 800, 1000
Preset value = 125 kbits/s

71
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.8 Function CANx_TRANSMIT


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
Function NOT for safety signals!
(For safety signals → function CAN_SAFETY_TRANSMIT)
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CANx_TRANSMIT
ID RESULT
DLC
DATA
ENABLE

Description
CANx_TRANSMIT transmits a CAN data object (message) to the CAN controller for transmission.
The function is called for each data object in the program cycle, also repeatedly in case of long
program cycles. The programmer must ensure by evaluating the function output RESULT that his
transmit order was accepted. Simplified it can be said that at 125 kbits/s one transmit order can be
executed per ms.
The execution of the function can be temporarily blocked (ENABLE = FALSE) via the input ENABLE.
So, for example a bus overload can be prevented.
Several data objects can be transmitted virtually at the same time if a flag is assigned to each data
object and controls the execution of the function via the ENABLE input.

NOTE
If the function CAN2_TRANSMIT is to be used, the second CAN interface must be initialised first using
the function CAN2 (→ page 69).

72
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ID WORD Number of the data object identifier
Permissible values = 0...2 047
DLC BYTE Number of bytes to be transmitted from the array DATA
Permissible values = 0...8
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF The array contains a maximum of 8 data bytes
BYTES
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
the function has accepted the transmit order

73
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.9 Function CANx_RECEIVE


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
Function NOT for safety signals!
(For safety signals → function CAN_SAFETY_RECEIVE)
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CANx_RECEIVE
CONFIG DATA
CLEAR DLC
ID RTR
AVAILABLE
OVERFLOW

Description
CANx_RECEIVE configures a data receive object and reads the receive buffer of the data object.
The function must be called once for each data object during initialisation, in order to inform the CAN
controller about the identifiers of the data objects.
In the further program cycle CANx_RECEIVE is called for reading the corresponding receive buffer,
also repeatedly in case of long program cycles. The programmer must ensure by evaluating the byte
AVAILABLE that newly received data objects are retrieved from the buffer and further processed.
Each call of the function decrements the byte AVAILABLE by 1. If the value of AVAILABLE is 0, there
is no data in the buffer.
By evaluating the output OVERFLOW, an overflow of the data buffer can be detected. If
OVERFLOW = TRUE at least 1 data object has been lost.

NOTE
If the function CAN2_RECEIVE is to be used, the second CAN interface must be initialised first using
the function CAN2 (→ page 69).

74
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
Configure data object
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR BOOL TRUE: deletes the data buffer (queue)
ID WORD Number of the data object identifier
Permissible values = 0...2 047

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF The array contains a maximum of 8 data bytes.
BYTES
DLC BYTE Number of bytes transmitted in the array DATA.
Possible values = 0...8.
RTR BOOL Not supported
AVAILABLE BYTE Number of received messages
OVERFLOW BOOL TRUE: Overflow of the data buffer → loss of data!
FALSE: buffer not yet full

75
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.10 Function CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
from ifm_CRnnnn_V05yyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
Function NOT for safety signals!
(For safety signals → function CAN_SAFETY_RECEIVE)
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE
CONFIG ID
CLEAR DATA
FIRST_ID DLC
LAST_ID AVAILABLE
OVERFLOW

Description
CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE configures a sequence of data receive objects and reads the receive buffer
of the data objects.
For the first CAN interface max. 2048 IDs per bit are possible.
For the second CAN interface max. 256 IDs per 11 OR 29 bits are possible.
The second CAN interface requires a long initialisation time. To ensure that the watchdog does not
react, the process should be distributed to several cycles in the case of bigger ranges. → Example
(→ page 78).
The function must be called once for each sequence of data objects during initialisation to inform the
CAN controller about the identifiers of the data objects.
The function must NOT be mixed with function CANx_RECEIVE (→ page 73) or function
CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE for the same IDs at the same CAN interfaces.
In the further program cycle CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE is called for reading the corresponding receive
buffer, also repeatedly in case of long program cycles. The programmer has to ensure by evaluating
the byte AVAILABLE that newly received data objects are retrieved from buffer SOFORT and are
further processed as the data are only available for one cycle.
Each call of the function decrements the byte AVAILABLE by 1. If the value of AVAILABLE is 0, there
is no data in the buffer.

76
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

By evaluating the output OVERFLOW, an overflow of the data buffer can be detected. If
OVERFLOW = TRUE, at least 1 data object has been lost.
Receive buffer: max. 16 software buffers per identifier.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
Configure data object
FALSE: Function is not executed
CLEAR BOOL TRUE: Deletes the data buffer (queue)
FIRST_ID CAN1: WORD Number of the first data object identifier of the sequence.
Permissible values normal frame = 0...2 047 (211)
CAN2: DWORD
Permissible values extended frame = 0...536 870 912 (229)
LAST_ID CAN1: WORD Number of the last data object identifier of the sequence.
Permissible values normal frame = 0...2 047 (211)
CAN2: DWORD
Permissible values extended frame = 0...536 870 912 (229)
LAST_ID has to be bigger than FIRST_ID.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ID CAN1: WORD ID of the transmitted data object
CAN2: DWORD
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF BYTE The array contains max. 8 data bytes
DLC BYTE Number of bytes transmitted in the array DATA
Possible values = 0...8.
AVAILABLE BYTE Number of messages in the buffer
OVERFLOW BOOL TRUE: Overflow of the data buffer → loss of data!
FALSE: Buffer not yet full

77
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Example Initialisation of CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE in 4 cycles

78
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.11 Function CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
For CAN interface 1: ifm_CAN1_EXT_Vxxyyzz.LIB
For CAN interface 2...n: ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
Function NOT for safety signals!
(For safety signals → function CAN_SAFETY_RECEIVE)
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL
CONFIG ID
CLEAR DATA
DLC
AVAILABLE
OVERFLOW

Description
CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL configures all data receive objects and reads the receive buffer of the
data objects.
The function must be called once during initialisation to inform the CAN controller about the identifiers
of the data objects.
In the further program cycle CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL is called for reading the corresponding
receive buffer, also repeatedly in case of long program cycles. The programmer must ensure by
evaluating the byte AVAILABLE that newly received data objects are retrieved from the buffer and
further processed.
Each call of the function decrements the byte AVAILABLE by 1. If the value of AVAILABLE is 0, there
is no data in the buffer.
By evaluating the output OVERFLOW, an overflow of the data buffer can be detected. If
OVERFLOW = TRUE at least 1 data object has been lost.
Receive buffer: max. 16 software buffers per identifier.

79
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
Configure data object
FALSE: Function is not executed
CLEAR BOOL TRUE: Deletes the data buffer (queue)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ID DWORD ID of the transmitted data object
DATA ARRAY[0...7] OF BYTE The array contains max. 8 data bytes
DLC BYTE Number of bytes transmitted in the array DATA
Possible values = 0...8.
AVAILABLE BYTE Number of messages in the buffer
OVERFLOW BOOL TRUE: Overflow of the data buffer → loss of data!
FALSE: Buffer not yet full

80
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

8.6.12 Function CANx_ERRORHANDLER


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CAN1_ERRORHANDLER
BUSOFF_RECOVER
CAN_RESTART

CAN2_ERRORHANDLER
BUSOFF_RECOVER

Description
Error routine for monitoring the CAN interfaces
The function CANx_ERRORHANDLER monitors the CAN interfaces and evaluates the CAN errors. If
a certain number of transmission errors occurs, the CAN participant becomes error passive. If the
error frequency decreases, the participant becomes error active again (= normal condition).
If a participant already is error passive and still transmission errors occur, it is disconnected from the
bus (= bus off) and the error bit CANx_BUSOFF is set. Returning to the bus is only possible if the "bus
off" condition has been removed (signal BUSOFF_RECOVER).
The function input CAN_RESTART is used for rectifying other CAN errors. The CAN interface is
reinitialised.
Afterwards, the error bit must be reset in the application program.
The procedures for the restart of the interfaces are different:
• For CAN interface 1 or devices with only one CAN interface:
set the input CAN_RESTART = TRUE (only 1 cycle)
• For CAN interface 2:
set the input START = TRUE (only 1 cycle) in the function CAN2 (→ page 69)

81
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Description of the CAN functions

NOTE
In principle, the function CAN2 (→ page 69) must be executed to initialise the second CAN interface,
before functions can be used for it.
If the automatic bus recover function is to be used (default setting) the function
CANx_ERRORHANDLER must not be integrated and instanced in the program!

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
BUSOFF_RECOVER BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
Remedy 'bus off' status
FALSE: function is not executed
CAN_RESTART BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
Completely reinitialise CAN interface 1
FALSE: function is not executed

82
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7 ifm CANopen library


CANopen network configuration, status and error handling
For all programmable devices the CANopen interface of CoDeSys is used. Whereas the network
configuration and parameter setting of the connected devices are directly carried out via the
programming software, the error messages can only be reached via nested variable structures in the
CANopen stack. The documentation below shows you the structure and use of the network
configuration and describes the functions of the ifm CANopen device libraries.
The chapters CANopen support by CoDeSys (→ page 83), CANopen master (→ page 85), CAN
device (→ page 100) and CAN network variables (→ page 108) describe the internal functions of the
CoDeSys CANopen stacks and their use. They also give information of how to use the network
configurator.
The chapters concerning the libraries ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.lib and
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.lib describe all functions for error handling and polling the
device status when used as master or slave (CAN device).

NOTE
Irrespective of the device used the structure of the function interfaces of all libraries is the same. The
slight differences (e.g. CANOPEN_LED_STATUS) are directly described in the corresponding
functions.
It is absolutely necessary to use only the corresponding device-specific library. The context can be
seen from the integrated article number of the device, e.g.:
CR0020: → ifm_CR0020_CANopenMaster_V040003.lib
→ chapter Setup the target (→ page 14)
When other libraries are used the device can no longer function correctly.

8.7.1 CANopen support by CoDeSys

General information about CANopen with CoDeSys


CoDeSys® is one of the leading systems for programming control systems to the international
standard IEC 61131. To make CoDeSys® more interesting for users many important functions were
integrated in the programming system, among them a configurator for CANopen. This CANopen
configurator enables configuration of CANopen networks (with some restrictions) under CoDeSys®.
CANopen is implemented as a CoDeSys® library in IEC 61131-3. The library is based on simple basic
CAN functions called CAN driver.
Implementation of the CANopen functions as CoDeSys® library enables simple scaling of the target
system. The CANopen function only uses target system resources if the function is really used. To
use target system resources carefully CoDeSys® automatically generates a data basis for the
CANopen master function which exactly corresponds to the configuration.
From the CoDeSys® programming system version 2.3.6.0 onwards an ecomat mobile controller can
be used as CANopen master and slave (CAN device).

83
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

NOTE:
For all ecomat mobile controllers and the PDM360 smart you must use CANopen libraries with the
following addition:
• For CR0032 target version up to V01, all other devices up to V04.00.05: "OptTable"
• For CR0032 target version from V02 onwards, all other devices from V05 onwards: "OptTableEx"
If a new project is created, these libraries are in general automatically loaded. If you add the libraries
via the library manager, you must ensure a correct selection.
The CANopen libraries without this addition are used for all other programmable devices (e.g. PDM360
compact).

CANopen terms and implementation


According to the CANopen specification there are no masters and slaves in a CAN network. Instead of
this there is an NMT master (NMT = network management), a configuration master, etc. according to
CANopen. It is always assumed that all participants of a CAN network have equal rights.
Implementation assumes that a CAN network serves as periphery of a CoDeSys programmable
controller. As a result of this an ecomatmobile controller or a PDM360 display is called CAN master in
the CAN configurator of CoDeSys. This master is an NMT master and configuration master. Normally
the master ensures that the network is put into operation. The master takes the initiative to start the
individual nodes (= network nodes) known via the configuration. These nodes are called slaves.
To bring the master closer to the status of a CANopen node an object directory was introduced for the
master. The master can also act as an SDO server (SDO = Service Data Object) and not only as SDO
client in the configuration phase of the slaves.

"Addresses" in CANopen
In CANopen there are different types of addresses (IDs):
• COB ID
The CAN Object Identifier addresses the message (= the CAN object) in the list of devices.
Identical messages have the same COB ID. The COB ID entries in the object directory contain the
CAN identifier (CAN ID) among others.
• CAN ID
The CAN Identifier identifies CAN messages in the complete network. The CAN ID is part of the
COB ID in the object directory.
• Node ID
The Node Identifier identifies the CANopen devices in the complete network. The Node ID is part
of some predefined CAN IDs (lower 7 bits).

84
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7.2 CANopen master

Differentiation from other CANopen libraries


The CANopen library implemented by 3S (Smart Software Solutions) differentiates from the systems
on the market in various points. It was not developed to make other libraries of renowned
manufacturers unnecessary but was deliberately optimised for use with the CoDeSys programming
and runtime system.
The libraries are based on the specifications of CiA DS301, V402.
For users the advantages of the CoDeSys CANopen library are as follows:
• Implementation is independent of the target system and can therefore be directly used on every
controller programmable with CoDeSys.
• The complete system contains the CANopen configurator and integration in the development
system.
• The CANopen functionality is reloadable. This means that the CANopen functions can be loaded
and updated without changing the operating system.
• The resources of the target system are used carefully. Memory is allocated depending on the used
configuration, not for a maximum configuration.
• Automatic updating of the inputs and outputs without additional measures.
The following functions defined in CANopen are at present supported by the ifm CANopen library:
• Transmitting PDOs: master transmits to slaves (slave = node, device)
Transmitting event-controlled (i.e. in case of a change), time-controlled (RepeatTimer) or as
synchronous PDOs, i.e. always when a SYNC was transmitted by the master. An external SYNC
source can also be used to initiate transmission of synchronous PDOs.
• Receiving PDOs: master receives from slave
Depending on the slave: event-controlled, request-controlled, acyclic and cyclic.
• PDO mapping
Assignment between a local object directory and PDOs from/to the CAN device (if supported by
the slave).
• Transmitting and receiving SDOs (unsegmented, i.e. 4 bytes per entry in the object directory)
Automatic configuration of all slaves via SDOs at the system start.
Application-controlled transmission and reception of SDOs to/from configured slaves.
• Synchronisation
Automatic transmission of SYNC messages by the CANopen master.
• Nodeguarding
Automatic transmission of guarding messages and lifetime monitoring for every slave configured
accordingly.
We recommend: It is better to work with the heartbeat function for current devices since then the
bus load is lower.
• Heartbeat
Automatic transmission and monitoring of heartbeat messages.
• Emergency
Reception of emergency messages from the configured slaves and message storage.
• Set Node-ID and baud rate in the slaves
By calling a simple function, node ID and baud rate of a slave can be set at runtime of the
application.

85
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

The following functions defined in CANopen are at present not supported by the CANopen 3S (Smart
Software Solutions) library:
• Dynamic identifier assignment,
• Dynamic SDO connections,
• SDO transfer block by block, segmented SDO transfer (the functionality can be implemented via
the function CANx_SDO_READ (→ page 139) and function CANx_SDO_WRITE (→ page 141) in
the corresponding ifm device library).
• All options of the CANopen protocol which are not mentioned above.

Create a CANopen project


Below the creation of a new project with a CANopen master is completely described step by step. It is
assumed that you have already installed CoDeSys on your processor and the Target and EDS files
have also been correctly installed or copied.
A more detailed description for setting and using the dialogue [controller and CANopen configuration]
is given in the CoDeSys manual under [Resources] > [PLC Configuration] or in the Online help.
After creation of a new project (→ chapter Setup the target, → page 14) the CANopen master must
first be added to the controller configuration via [Insert] > [Append subelement]. For controllers with 2
or more CAN interfaces interface 1 is automatically configured for the master.
The following libraries and software modules are automatically integrated:
• The Standard.LIB which provides the standard functions for the controller defined in IEC
61131.
• The 3S_CanOpenManager.LIB which provides the CANopen basic functionalities
(possibly 3S_CanOpenManagerOptTable.LIB for the C167 controller)
• One or several of the libraries 3S_CANopenNetVar.LIB, 3S_CANopenDevice.LIB and
3S_CANopenMaster.LIB (possibly 3S_...OptTable.LIB for the C167 controller) depending
on the requested functionality
• The system libraries SysLibSem.LIB and SysLibCallback.LIB
• To use the prepared network diagnostic, status and EMCY functions, the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB must be manually added to the library manager.
Without this library the network information must be directly read from the nested structures of the
CoDeSys CANopen libraries.
The following libraries and software modules must still be integrated:
• The device library for the corresponding hardware, e.g. ifm_CR0020_Vxxyyzz.LIB. This library
provides all device-specific functions.
• EDS files for all slaves to be operated on the network. The EDS files are provided for all CANopen
slaves by ifm electronic.
► For the EDS files of other manufacturers' nodes contact the corresponding manufacturer.

86
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

NOTE
For the ecomatmobile controllers and PDM360 smart the CANopen support by CoDeSys can only be
activated for the 1st CAN interface.
If the CAN master has already been added, the controller can no longer be used as a CAN device via
CoDeSys.
Implementation of a separate protocol on interface 2 or using the protocol to SAE J1939 or ISO11992 is
possible at any time.
For PDM360 and for PDM360 compact both CAN interfaces can be used as CANopen master or CAN
device.
For CRnn32 devices you can use all CAN interfaces with all protocols.

Tab [CAN parameters]


The most important parameters for the master can be set in this dialogue window. If necessary, the
contents of the master EDS file can be viewed via the button [EDS...]. This button is only indicated if
the EDS file (e.g. CR0020MasterODEntry.EDS) is in the directory ...\CoDeSys
V2.3\Library\PLCConf.
During the compilation of the application program the object directory of the master is automatically
generated from this EDS file.

Baud rate
Select the baud rate for the master. It must correspond to the transmission speed of the other network
participants.

87
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Communication Cycle Period/Sync. Window Length


After expiry of the [Communication Cycle Period] a SYNC message is transmitted by the master.
The [Sync. Window Length] indicates the time during which synchronous PDOs are transmitted by the
other network participants and must be received by the master.
As in most applications no special requirements are made for the SYNC object, the same time can be
set for [Communication Cycle Period] and [Sync. Window Length]. Please ensure the time is entered
in [µs] (the value 50 000 corresponds to 50 ms).
SYNC-Objekt Synchrones Objektfenster SYNC-Objekt SYNC-Objekt
SYNC object Synchronous object window SYNC object SYNC object

Zeit
Time

Synchrone PDOs Asynchrone PDOs


Synchronous PDOs Asynchronous PDOs

Communication Cycle Period Sync. Window Lenght

Sync. COB ID
In this field the identifier for the SYNC message can be set. It is always transmitted after the
communication cycle period has elapsed. The default value is 128 and should normally not be
changed. To activate transmission of the SYNC message, the checkbox [activate] must be set.

NOTE
The SYNC message is always generated at the start of a program cycle. The inputs are then read, the
program is processed, the outputs are written to and then all synchronous PDOs are transmitted.
Please note that the SYNC time becomes longer if the set SNYC time is shorter than the program cycle
time.
Example: communication cycle period = 10 ms and program cycle time = 30 ms.
The SYNC message is only transmitted after 30 ms.

Node ID
Enter the node number (not the download ID!) of the master in this field. The node number may only
occur once in the network, otherwise the communication is disturbed.
Automatic startup
After successful configuration the network and the connected nodes are set to the state [operational]
and then started.
If the checkbox is not activated, the network must be started manually.
Heartbeat
If the other participants in the network support heartbeat, the option [support DSP301, V4.01...] can be
selected. If necessary, the master can generate its own heartbeat signal after the set time has
elapsed.

88
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Add and configure CANopen slaves


Next you can add the CAN slaves. To do so, you must call again the dialogue in the controller
configuration [Insert] > [Append subelement]. A list of the CANopen device descriptions (EDS files)
stored in the directory PLC_CONF is available. By selecting the corresponding device it is directly
added to the tree of the controller configuration.

NOTE
If a slave is added via the configuration dialogue in CoDeSys, source code is dynamically integrated in
the application program for every node. At the same time every additionally inserted slave extends the
cycle time of the application program. This means: In a network with many slaves the master can
process no further time-critical tasks (e.g. FB OCC_TASK).
A network with 27 slaves has a basic cycle time of 30 ms.
Please note that the maximum time for a PLC cycle of approx. 50 ms should not be exceeded
(watchdog time: 100 ms).

Tab [CAN parameters]


Node ID
The node ID is used to clearly identify the CAN module and corresponds to the number on the module
set between 1 and 127. The ID is entered decimally and is automatically increased by 1 if a new
module is added.
Write DCF
If [Write DCF] is activated, a DCF file is created after adding an EDS file to the set directory for
compilation files. The name of the DCF file consists of the name of the EDS file and appended node
ID.
Create all SDO's
If this option is activated, SDOs are generated for all communication objects. (Default values are not
written again!)

89
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Node reset
The slave is reset ("load") as soon as the configuration is loaded to the controller.
Optional device
If the option [optional device] is activated, the master tries only once to read from this node. In case of
a missing response, the node is ignored and the master goes to the normal operating state.
If the slave is connected to the network and detected at a later point in time, it is automatically started.
To do so, you must have selected the option [Automatic startup] in the CAN parameters of the master.
No initialization
If this option is activated, the master immediately takes the node into operation without transmitting
configuration SDOs. (Nevertheless, the SDO data is generated and stored in the controller.)
Nodeguarding / heartbeat settings
Depending on the device [nodeguarding] and [life time factor] or [heartbeat] must be set.
We recommend: It is better to work with the heartbeat function for current devices since then the bus
load is lower.
Emergency telegram
This option is normally selected. The EMCY messages are transferred with the specified identifier.
Communication cycle
In special applications a monitoring time for the SYNC messages generated by the master can be set
here. Please note that this time must be longer than the SYNC time of the master. The optimum value
must be determined experimentally, if necessary.
In most cases nodeguarding and heartbeat are sufficient for node monitoring.

Tab [Receive PDO-Mapping] and [Send PDO-Mapping]


With the tabs [Receive PDO-Mapping] and [Send PDO-Mapping] in the configuration dialogue of a
CAN module the module mapping (assignment between local object directory and PDOs from/to the
CAN device) described in the EDS file can be changed (if supported by the CAN module).
All [mappable] objects of the EDS file are available on the left and can be added to or removed from
the PDOs (Process Data Objects) on the right. The [StandardDataTypes] can be added to generate
spaces in the PDO.
Insert
With the button [Insert] you can generate more PDOs and insert the corresponding objects. The inputs
and outputs are assigned to the IEC addresses via the inserted PDOs. In the controller configuration
the settings made can be seen after closing the dialogue. The individual objects can be given symbolic
names.
Properties
The PDO properties defined in the standard can be edited in a dialogue via properties.
COB-ID Every PDO message requires a clear COB ID (communication object identifier). If an
option is not supported by the module or the value must not be changed, the field is
grey and cannot be edited.
Inhibit Time The inhibit time (100 µs) is the minimum time between two messages of this PDO so
that the messages which are transferred when the value is changed are not
transmitted too often. The unit is 100 µs.

90
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Transmission For transmission type you receive a selection of possible transmission modes for
Type this module:
acyclic – synchronous
After a change the PDO is transferred with the next SYNC.
cyclic – synchronous
The PDO is transferred synchronously. [Number of SYNCs] indicates the number of
the synchronisation messages between two transmissions of this PDO.
asynchronous – device profile specific
The PDO is transmitted on event, i.e. when the value is changed. The device profile
defines which data can be transferred in this way.
asynchronous – manufacturer specific
The PDO is transmitted on event, i.e. when the value is changed. The device
manufacturer defines which data is transferred in this way.
(a)synchronous – RTR only
These services are not implemented.
Number of SYNCs
Depending on the transmission type this field can be edited to enter the number of
synchronisation messages (definition in the CAN parameter dialogue of [Com. Cycle
Period], [Sync Window Length], [Sync. COB ID]) after which the PDO is to be
transmitted again.
Event-Time
Depending on the transmission type the period in milliseconds [ms] required
between two transmissions of the PDO is indicated in this field.

Tab [Service Data Objects]


Index, name, value, type and default
Here all objects of the EDS or DCF file are listed which are in the range from index 200016 to 9FFF16
and defined as writable. Index, name, value, type and default are indicated for every object. The value
can be changed. Select the value and press the [space bar]. After the change you can confirm the
value with the button [Enter] or reject it with [ESC].
For the initialisation of the CAN bus the set values are transferred as SDOs (Service Data Object) to
the CAN module thus having direct influence on the object directory of the CAN slave. Normally they
are written again at every start of the application program – irrespective of whether they are
permanently stored in the CAN device.

Master at runtime
Here you find information about the functionality of the CANopen master libraries at runtime.
The CANopen master library provides the CoDeSys application with implicit services which are
sufficient for most applications. These services are integrated for users in a transparent manner and
are available in the application without additional calls. The following description assumes that the
library ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB was manually added to the library manager to
use the network diagnostic, status and EMCY functions.
Services of the CANopen master library:
Reset of all configured slaves on the bus at the system start
To reset the slaves, the NMT command "Reset Remote Node" is used as standard explicitly for every
slave separately. (NMT stands for Network Management according to CANopen. The individual
commands are described in the CAN document DSP301.) In order to avoid overload of slaves having
less powerful CAN controllers it is useful to reset the slaves using the command "All Remote Nodes".
The service is performed for all configured slaves using the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS

91
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

(→ page 123) with GLOBAL_START=TRUE. If the slaves are to be reset individually, this input must
be set to FALSE.
Polling of the slave device type using SDO (polling for object 100016) and comparison with the
configured slave ID
Indication of an error status for the slaves from which a wrong device type was received. The request
is repeated after 0.5 s if no device type was received AND the slave was not identified as optional in
the configuration AND the timeout has not elapsed.
Configuration of all correctly detected devices using SDO
Every SDO is monitored for a response and repeated if the slave does not respond within the
monitoring time.
Automatic configuration of slaves using SDOs while the bus is in operation
Prerequisite: The slave logged in the master via a bootup message.
Start of all correctly configured slaves after the end of the configuration of the corresponding
slave
To start the slaves the NMT command "Start remote node" is normally used. As for the "reset" this
command can be replaced by "Start All Remote Nodes". The service can be called via the function
CANx_Master_STATUS with GLOBAL_START=TRUE.
Cyclical transmission of the SYNC message
This value can only be set during the configuration.
Setting of nodeguarding with lifetime monitoring for every slave possible
The error status can be monitored for max. 8 slaves via the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS with
ERROR_CONTROL=TRUE.
We recommend: It is better to work with the heartbeat function for current devices since then the bus
load is lower.
Heartbeat from the master to the slaves and monitoring of the heartbeats of the slaves
The error status can be monitored for max. 8 slaves via the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS with
ERROR_CONTROL=TRUE.
Reception of emergency messages for every slave, the emergency messages received last are
stored separately for every slave
The error messages can be read via the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS with
EMERGENCY_OBJECT_SLAVES=TRUE. In addition this function provides the EMCY message
generated last on the output GET_EMERGENCY.

92
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Start the network


Here you find information about how to start the CANopen network.
After downloading the project to the controller or a reset of the application the master starts up the
CAN network again. This always happens in the same order of actions:
• All slaves are reset unless they are marked as "No initialization" in the configurator. They are reset
individually using the NMT command "Reset Node" (8116) with the node ID of the slave. If the flag
GLOBAL_START was set via the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123), the
command is used once with the node ID 0 to start up the network.
• All slaves are configured. To do so, the object 100016 of the slave is polled.
If the slave responds within the monitoring time of 0.5 s, the next configuration SDO is
transmitted.
If a slave is marked as "optional" and does not respond to the polling for object 100016
within the monitoring time, it is marked as not available and no further SDOs are
transmitted to it.
If a slave responds to the polling for object 100016 with a type other than the configured
one (in the lower 16 bits), it is configured but marked as a wrong type.
All SDOs are repeated as long as a response of the slave was seen within the monitoring time. Here
the application can monitor start-up of the individual slaves and possibly react by setting the flag
SET_TIMEOUT_STATE in the NODE_STATE_SLAVE array of the function
CANx_MASTER_STATUS.
• If the master configured a heartbeat time unequal to 0, the heartbeat is generated immediately
after the start of the master controller.
• After all slaves have received their configuration SDOs, guarding starts for slaves with configured
nodeguarding.
• If the master was configured to [Automatic startup], all slaves are now started individually by the
master. To do so, the NMT command "Start Remote Node" (116) is used. If the flag
GLOBAL_START was set via the function CANx_Master_STATUS, the command is used with the
node ID 0 and so all slaves are started with "Start all Nodes".
• All configured TX-PDOs are transmitted at least once (for the slaves RX-PDOs).
• If [Automatic startup] is deactivated, the slaves must be started separately via the flag
START_NODE in the NODE_STATE_SLAVE array or via the function input GLOBAL_START of
the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS.

93
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Network states
Here you read how to interpret the states of the CANopen network and how to react.
For the start-up (→ page 93) of the CANopen network and during operation the individual functions of
the library pass different states.

NOTE
In the monitor mode (online mode) of CoDeSys the states of the CAN network can be seen in the
global variable list "CANOpen implicit variables". This requires exact knowledge of CANopen and the
structure of the CoDeSys CANopen libraries.
To facilitate access the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123) from the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB is available.

Boot up of the CANopen master


During boot-up of the CAN network the master passes different states which can be read via the
output NODE_STATE of the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123).
State Description
0, 1, 2 These states are automatically passed by the master and in the first cycles after a PLC
start.
3 State 3 of the master is maintained for some time. In state 3 the master configures its
slaves. To do so, all SDOs generated by the configurator are transmitted to the slaves
one after the other.
5 After transmission of all SDOs to the slaves the master goes to state 5 and remains in this
state. State 5 is the normal operating state for the master.
Whenever a slave does not respond to an SDO request (upload or download), the request is repeated.
The master leaves state 3, as described above, but not before all SDOs have been transmitted
successfully. So it can be detected whether a slave is missing or whether the master has not correctly
received all SDOs. It is of no importance for the master whether a slave responds with an
acknowledgement or an abort. It is only important for the master whether he received a response at
all.
An exception is a slave marked as "optional". Optional slaves are asked for their 1000h object only
once. If they do not respond within 0.5 s, the slave is first ignored by the master and the master goes
to state 5 without further reaction of this slave.

94
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Boot up of the CANopen slaves


You can read the states of a slave via the array NODE_STATE_SLAVE of the function
CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123). During boot up of the CAN network the slave passes the
states -1, 1 and 2 automatically. The states have to be interpreted as follows:
State Description
-1 The slave is reset by the NMT message "Reset Node" and automatically goes to state 1.
1 After max. 2 s or immediately on reception of its boot up message the slave goes to state
2.
2 After a delay of 0.5 s the slave automatically goes to state 3. This period corresponds to
the experience that many CANopen devices are not immediately ready to receive their
configuration SDOs after transmission of their boot up message.
3 The slave is configured in state 3. The slave remains in state 3 as long as it has received
all SDOs generated by the configurator. It is not important whether during the slave
configuration the response to SDO transfers is abort (error) or whether the response to all
SDO transfers is no error. Only the response as such received by the slave is important –
not its contents.
If in the configurator the option "Reset node" has been activated, a new reset of the node
is carried out after transmitting the object 101116 sub-index 1 which then contains the
value "load". The slave is then polled again with the upload of the object 100016.
Slaves with a problem during the configuration phase remain in state 3 or directly go to an
error state (state > 5) after the configuration phase.
After passing the configuration phase, the slave can go to the following states:
State Description
4 A node always goes to state 4 except for the following cases: it is an "optional" slave and
it was detected as non available on the bus (polling for object 100016) or the slave is
present but reacted to the polling for object 100016 with a type in the lower 16 bits other
than expected by the configurator.
5 State 5 is the normal operating state of the slave.
If the master was configured to "Automatic startup", the slave starts in state 4 (i.e. a "start
node" NMT message is generated) and the slave goes automatically to state 5.
If the flag GLOBAL_START of the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS was set by the
application, the master waits until all slaves are in state 4. All slaves are then started with
the NMT command "Start All Nodes".
97 A node goes to state 97 if it is optional (optional device in the CAN configuration) and has
not reacted to the SDO polling for object 100016.
If the slave is connected to the network and detected at a later point in time, it is
automatically started. To do so, you must have selected the option "Automatic startup" in
the CAN parameters of the master.
98 A node goes to state 98 if the device type (object 100016) does not correspond to the
configured type.
If the slave is in state 4 or higher, nodeguard messages are transmitted to the slave if nodeguarding
was configured.

95
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Nodeguarding/heartbeat error
State Description
99 In case of a nodeguarding timeout the variable NODE_STATE in the array
NODE_STATE_SLAVE of the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123) is set
to 99.
As soon as the node reacts again to nodeguard requests and the option [Automatic
startup] is activated, it is automatically started by the master. Depending on the status
contained in the response to the nodeguard requests, the node is newly configured or
only started.
To start the slave manually it is sufficient to use the method "NodeStart".
The same applies to heartbeat errors.
The current CANopen state of a node can be called via the structure element LAST_STATE from the
array NODE_STATE_SLAVE of the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS.
State Description
0 The node is in the boot up state.
4 The node is in the PREPARED state.
5 The node is in the OPERATIONAL state.
127 The node is in the PREOPERATIONAL state.

8.7.3 Start-up of the network without [Automatic startup]


Sometimes it is necessary that the application determines the instant to start the CANopen slaves. To
do so, the option [Automatic startup] of the CAN master must be deactivated in the configuration. It is
then up to the application to start the slaves.
To start a slave via the application, the structure element START_NODE in the array
NODE_STATE_SLAVES must be set.
The array is assigned to the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS via the ADR operator.

Starting the network with GLOBAL_START


In a CAN network with many participants (in most cases more than 8) it often happens that NMT
messages in quick succession are not detected by all (mostly slow) IO nodes (e.g. CompactModules
CR2013). The reason for this is that these nodes must listen to all messages with the ID 0. NMT
messages transmitted at too short intervals overload the receive buffer of such nodes.
A help for this is to reduce the number of NMT messages in quick succession.
► To do so, set the input GLOBAL_START of the function CANx_Master_STATUS (→ page 123) to
TRUE (with [Automatic startup]).
> The CANopen master library uses the command "Start All Nodes" instead of starting all nodes
individually using the command "Start Node".
> GLOBAL_START is executed only once when the network is initialised.
> If this input is set, the controller also starts nodes with status 98 (see above). However, the PDOs
for these nodes remain deactivated.

96
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Starting the network with START_ALL_NODES


If the network is not automatically started with GLOBAL_START of the function
CANx_Master_STATUS (→ page 123), it can be started at any time, i.e. every node one after the
other. If this is not requested, the option is as follows:
► Set the function input START_ALL_NODES of the function CANx_Master_STATUS to TRUE.
START_ALL_NODES is typically set by the application program at runtime.
> If this input is set, nodes with status 98 (see above) are started. However, the PDOs for these
nodes remain deactivated.

Initialisation of the network with RESET_ALL_NODES


The same reasons which apply to the command START_ALL_NODES also apply to the NMT
command RESET_ALL_NODES (instead of RESET_NODES for every individual node).
► To do so, the input RESET_ALL_NODES of the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123)
must be set to TRUE.
> This resets all nodes once at the same time.

Access to the status of the CANopen master


You should poll the status of the master so that the application code is not processed before the IO
network is ready. The following code fragment example shows one option:

Variable declaration
VAR
FB_MasterStatus:= CR0020_MASTER_STATUS;
:
END_VAR

program code
If FB_MasterStatus. NODE_STATE = 5 then
<application code>
End_if

By setting the flag TIME_OUT_STATE in the array NODE_STATE_SLAVE of the function


CANx_Master_STATUS (→ page 123) the application can react and, for example, jump the non
configurable node.

The object directory of the CANopen master


In some cases it is helpful if the CAN master has its own object directory. This enables, for example,
the exchange of data of the application with other CAN nodes.
The object directory of the master is generated using an EDS file named
CRnnnnMasterODEntry.EDS during compilation and is given default values. This EDS file is stored
in the directory CoDeSys Vn\Library\PLCconf. The content of the EDS file can be viewed via the
button [EDS...] in the configuration window [CAN parameters].
Even if the object directory is not available, the master can be used without restrictions.

97
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

The object directory is accessed by the application via an array with the following structure:

Structure element Description


dwIdxSubIdxF Structure of the component 16#iiiissff:
iiii – index (2 bytes, bits 16-31), Idx
ss – sub-index (1 byte, bits 8-15), SubIdx
ff – flags (1 byte, bits 0-7), F
Meaning of the flag bits:
bit 0: write
bit 1: content is a pointer to an address
bit 2: mappable
bit 3: swap
bit 4: signed value
bit 5: floating point
bit 6: contains more sub-indices
dwContent contains the contents of the entry
wLen length of the data
byAttrib initially intended as access authorisation
can be freely used by the application of the master
byAccess in the past access authorisation
can be freely used by the application of the master
On the platform CoDeSys has no editor for this object directory.
The EDS file only determines the objects used to create the object directory. The entries are always
generated with length 4 and the flags (least significant byte of the component of an object directory
entry dwIdxSubIdxF) are always given the value 1. This means both bytes have the value 16#41.
If an object directory is available in the master, the master can act as SDO server in the network.
Whenever a client accesses an entry of the object directory by writing, this is indicated to the
application via the flag OD_CHANGED in the function CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123). After
evaluation this flag must be reset.
The application can use the object directory by directly writing to or reading the entries or by pointing
the entries to IEC variables. This means: when reading/writing to another node these IEC variables
are directly accessed.

98
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

If index and sub-index of the object directory are known, an entry can be addressed as follows:
I := GetODMEntryValue(16#iiiiss00, pCanOpenMaster[0].wODMFirstIdx,
pCanOpenMaster[0].wODMFirstIdx + pCanOpenMaster[0]. wODMCount;
For "iii" the index must be used and for "ss" the sub-index (as hex values).
The number of the array entry is available in I. You can now directly access the components of the
entry.
It is sufficient to enter address, length and flags so that this entry can be directly transferred to an IEC
variable:
ODMEntries[I].dwContent := ADR(<variable name>);
ODMEntries[I].wLen := sizeof(<variable name>);
ODMEntries[I]. dwIdxSubIdxF := ODMEntries[I]. dwIdxSubIdxF OR
OD_ENTRYFLG_WRITE OR OD_ENTRYFLG_ISPOINTER;
It is sufficient to change the content of "dwContent" to change only the content of the entry.

99
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7.4 CAN device


CAN device is another name for a CANopen slave or CANopen node.
A CoDeSys programmable controller can also be a CANopen slave in a CAN network.

Functionality
The CAN device library in combination with the CANopen configurator provides the user with the
following options:
• In CoDeSys configuration of the properties for nodeguarding/heartbeat, emergency, node ID and
baud rate at which the device is to operate.
• Together with the parameter manager in CoDeSys, a default PDO mapping can be created which
can be changed by the master at runtime. The PDO mapping is changed by the master during the
configuration phase. By means of mapping IEC variables of the application can be mapped to
PDOs. This means IEC variables are assigned to the PDOs to be able to easily evaluate them in
the application program.
• The CAN device library provides an object directory. The size of this object directory is defined
while compiling CoDeSys. This directory contains all objects which describe the CAN device and
in addition the objects defined by the parameter manager. In the parameter manager only the list
types parameters and variables can be used for the CAN device.
• The library manages the access to the object directory, i.e. it acts as SDO server on the bus.
• The library monitors nodeguarding or the heartbeat consumer time (always only of one producer)
and sets corresponding error flags for the application.
• An EDS file can be generated which describes the configured properties of the CAN device so that
the device can be integrated and configured as a slave under a CAN master.
The CAN device library explicitly does not provide the following functionalities described in CANopen
(all options of the CANopen protocol which are not indicated here or in the above section are not
implemented either):
• Dynamic SDO and PDO identifiers
• SDO block transfer
• Automatic generation of emergency messages. Emergency messages must always be generated
by the application using the function CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 131) and the
function CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 133). To do so, the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB provides these functions.
• Dynamic changes of the PDO properties are currently only accepted on arrival of a StartNode
NMT message, not with the mechanisms defined in CANopen.

100
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

CAN device configuration


To use the controller as CANopen slave (device) the CANopen slave must first be added via [Insert] >
[Append subelement]. For controllers with 2 or more CAN interfaces the CAN interface 1 is
automatically configured as a slave. All required libraries are automatically added to the library
manager.

Tab [Base settings]

Bus identifier
is currently not used.
Name of updatetask
Name of the task where the CAN device is called.
Generate EDS file
If an EDS file is to be generated from the settings to be able to add the CAN device to any master
configuration, the option [Generate EDS file] must be activated and the name of a file must be
indicated. As an option a template file can be indicated whose entries are added to the EDS file of the
CAN device. In case of overlapping the template definitions are not overwritten.

Example of an object directory


The following entries could for example be in the object directory:
[FileInfo]
FileName=D:\CoDeSys\lib2\plcconf\MyTest.eds
FileVersion=1
FileRevision=1
Description=EDS for CoDeSys-Project:
D:\CoDeSys\CANopenTestprojekte\TestHeartbeatODsettings_Device.pro
CreationTime=13:59
CreationDate=09-07-2005
CreatedBy=CoDeSys
ModificationTime=13:59
ModificationDate=09-07-2005
ModifiedBy=CoDeSys
[DeviceInfo]
VendorName=3S Smart Software Solutions GmbH
ProductName=TestHeartbeatODsettings_Device
ProductNumber=0x33535F44
ProductVersion=1
ProductRevision=1
OrderCode=xxxx.yyyy.zzzz
LMT_ManufacturerName=3S GmbH
LMT_ProductName=3S_Dev
BaudRate_10=1
BaudRate_20=1

101
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

BaudRate_50=1
BaudRate_100=1
BaudRate_125=1
BaudRate_250=1
BaudRate_500=1
BaudRate_800=1
BaudRate_1000=1
SimpleBootUpMaster=1
SimpleBootUpSlave=0
ExtendedBootUpMaster=1
ExtendedBootUpSlave=0
...
[1018sub0]
ParameterName=Number of entries
ObjectType=0x7
DataType=0x5
AccessType=ro
DefaultValue=2
PDOMapping=0
[1018sub1]
ParameterName=VendorID
ObjectType=0x7
DataType=0x7
AccessType=ro
DefaultValue=0x0
PDOMapping=0
[1018sub2]
ParameterName=Product Code
ObjectType=0x7
DataType=0x7
AccessType=ro
DefaultValue=0x0
PDOMapping=0

For the meaning of the individual objects please see the CANopen specification DS301.
In addition to the prescribed entries, the EDS file contains the definitions for SYNC, guarding,
emergency and heartbeat. If these objects are not used, the values are set to 0 (preset). But as the
objects are present in the object directory of the slave at runtime, they are written to in the EDS file.
The same goes for the entries for the communication and mapping parameters. All 8 possible sub-
indices of the mapping objects 16xx16 or 1Axx16 are present, but possibly not considered in the sub-
index 0.
NOTE: Bit mapping is not supported by the library!

102
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Tab [CAN settings]

Here you can set the node ID and the baud rate.
Device type
(this is the default value of the object 100016 entered in the EDS) has 19116 as default value (standard
IO device) and can be freely changed.
The index of the CAN controller results from the position of the CAN device in the controller
configuration.
The nodeguarding parameters, the heartbeat parameters and the emergency COB ID can also be
defined in this tab. The CAN device can only be configured for the monitoring of a heartbeat.
We recommend: It is better to work with the heartbeat function for current devices since then the bus
load is lower.

103
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Tab [Default PDO mapping]

In this tab the assignment between local object directory (OD editor) and PDOs transmitted/received
by the CAN device can be defined. Such an assignment is called "mapping".
In the object directory entries used (variable OD) the connection to variables of the application is made
between object index/sub-index. You only have to ensure that the sub-index 0 of an index containing
more than one sub-index contains the information concerning the number of the sub-indices.

104
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example list of variables


The data for the variable PLC_PRG.a is to be received on the first receive PDO (COB ID = 512 + node
ID) of the CAN device.

Info
[Variables] and [parameters] can be selected as list type.
For the exchange of data (e.g. via PDOs or other entries in the object directory) a variable list is
created.
The parameter list should be used if you do not want to link object directory entries to application
variables. For the parameter list only the index 100616 / SubIdx 0 is currently predefined. In this entry
the value for the "Com. Cycle Period" can be entered by the master. This signals the absence of the
SYNC message.

So you have to create a variable list in the object directory (parameter manager) and link an index/sub-
index to the variable PLC_PRG.a.
► To do so, add a line to the variable list (a click on the right mouse button opens the context menu)
and enter a variable name (any name) as well as the index and sub-index.
► The only allowed access right for a receive PDO is [write only].
► Enter "PLC_PRG.a" in the column [variable] or press [F2] and select the variable.

NOTE
Data to be read by the CAN master (e.g. inputs, system variables) must have the access right [read
only].
Data to be written by the CAN master (e.g. outputs in the slave) must have the access right [write only].
SDO parameters to be written and at the same time to be read from and written to the slave application
by the CAN master must have the access right [read-write].

To be able to open the parameter manager the parameter manager must be activated in the target
settings under [Network functionality]. The areas for index/sub-index already contain sensible values
and should not be changed.

105
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

In the default PDO mapping of the CAN device the index/sub-index entry is then assigned to a receive
PDO as mapping entry. The PDO properties can be defined via the dialogue known from Add and
configure CANopen slaves (→ page 89).
Only objects from the parameter manager with the attributes [read only] or [write only] are marked in
the possibly generated EDS file as mappable (= can be assigned) and occur in the list of the
mappable objects. All other objects are not marked as mappable in the EDS file.

NOTE
If more than 8 data bytes are mapped to a PDO, the next free identifiers are then automatically used
until all data bytes can be transferred.
To obtain a clear structure of the identifiers used you should add the correct number of the receive and
transmit PDOs and assign them the variable bytes from the list.

Changing the standard mapping by the master configuration


You can change the default PDO mapping (in the CAN device configuration) within certain limits by the
master.
The rule applies that the CAN device cannot recreate entries in the object directory which are not yet
available in the standard mapping (default PDO mapping in the CAN device configuration). For a PDO,
for example, which contains a mapped object in the default PDO mapping no second object can be
mapped in the master configuration.
So the mapping changed by the master configuration can at most contain the PDOs available in the
standard mapping. Within these PDOs there are 8 mapping entries (sub-indices).
Possible errors which may occur are not displayed, i.e. the supernumerary PDO definitions /
supernumerary mapping entries are processed as if not present.
In the master the PDOs must always be created starting from 140016 (receive PDO communication
parameter) or 180016 (transmit PDO communication parameter) and follow each other without
interruption.

106
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Access to the CAN device at runtime

Setting of the node numbers and the baud rate of a CAN device
For the CAN device the node number and the baud rate can be set at runtime of the application
program.
► For setting the node number the function CANx_SLAVE_NODEID (→ page 130) of the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.lib is used.
► For setting the baud rate the function CAN1_BAUDRATE (→ page 58) or the function CAN1_EXT
(→ page 63) or the function CANx of the corresponding device library is used for the controllers
and the PDM360 smart. For PDM360 or PDM360 compact the function
CANx_SLAVE_BAUDRATE is available via the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.lib.

Access to the OD entries by the application program


As standard, there are entries in the object directory which are mapped to variables (parameter
manager).
However, there are also automatically generated entries of the CAN device which cannot be mapped
to the contents of a variable via the parameter manager. Via the function CANx_SLAVE_STATUS
(→ page 136) these entries are available in the library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB.

Change the PDO properties at runtime


If the properties of a PDO are to be changed at runtime, this is done by another node via SDO write
access as described by CANopen.
As an alternative, it is possible to directly write a new property, e.g. the "event time" of a send PDO
and then transmit a command "StartNode-NMT" to the node although it has already been started. As a
result of this the device reinterprets the values in the object directory.

Transmit emergency messages via the application program


To transmit an emergency message via the application program the function
CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 131) and the function
CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 133) can be used. The library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB provides these functions.

107
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7.5 CAN network variables

General information
Network variables
Network variables are one option to exchange data between two or several controllers. For users the
mechanism should be easy to use. At present network variables are implemented on the basis of CAN
and UDP. The variable values are automatically exchanged on the basis of broadcast messages. In
UDP they are implemented as broadcast messages, in CAN as PDOs. These services are not
confirmed by the protocol, i.e. it is not checked whether the receiver receives the message. Exchange
of network variables corresponds to a "1 to n connection" (1 transmitter to n receivers).
Object directory
The object directory is another option to exchange variables. This is a 1 to 1 connection using a
confirmed protocol. The user can check whether the message arrived at the receiver. The exchange is
not carried out automatically but via the call of functions from the application program.
→ chapter The object directory of the CANopen master (→ page 97)

Configuration of CAN network variables


To use the network variables with CoDeSys you need the libraries 3s_CanDrv.lib,
3S_CANopenManager.lib and 3S_CANopenNetVar.lib. You also need the library
SysLibCallback.lib.
CoDeSys automatically generates the required initialisation code and the call of the network blocks at
the start and end of the cycle.

Settings in the target settings

► Select the dialogue box [Target settings].


► Select the tab [Network functionality].
► Activate the check box [Support network variables].
► Enter the name of the requested network, here CAN, in [Names of supported network interfaces].
► To use network variables you must also add a CAN master or CAN slave (device) to the controller
configuration.

108
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

► Please note the particularities when using network variables for the corresponding device types.
→ Chapter Particularities for network variables (→ page 112)

Settings in the global variable lists


► Create a new global variable list. In this list the variables to be exchanged with other controllers
are defined.
► Open the dialogue with the menu point [Object Properties].
> The window [Properties] appears:

If you want to define the network properties:


► Click the button [Add network].
If you have configured several network connections, you can also configure here several
connections per variable list.

109
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

> The window [Properties] extends as follows:

Meaning of the options:


Network type
As network type you can enter one of the network names indicated in the target settings.
If you click on the button [Settings] next to it, you can select the CAN interface:
1. CAN interface: value = 0
2. CAN interface: value = 1
etc.
Pack variables
If this option is activated with [v], the variables are combined, if possible, in one transmisson unit. For
CAN the size of a transmission unit is 8 bytes. If it is not possible to include all variables of the list in
one transmission unit, several transmission units are formed for this list.
If the option is not activated, every variable has its own transmission unit.
If [Transmit on change] is configured, it is checked separately for every transmission unit whether it
has been changed and must be transmitted.
List identifier (COB-ID)
The basic identifier is used as a unique identification to exchange variable lists of different projects.
Variable lists with identical basic identifier are exchanged. Ensure that the definitions of the variable
lists with the same basic identifier match in the different projects.

110
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

NOTE
In CAN networks the basic identifier is directly used as COB-ID of the CAN messages. It is not checked
whether the identifier is also used in the remaining CAN configuration.
To ensure a correct exchange of data between two controllers the global variable lists in the two
projects must match. To ensure this you can use the feature [Link to file]. A project can export the
variable list file before compilation, the other projects should import this file before compilation.
In addition to simple data types a variable list can also contain structures and arrays. The elements of
these combined data types are transmitted separately.
Strings must not be transmitted via network variables as otherwise a runtime error will occur and the
watchdog will be activated.
If a variable list is larger than a PDO of the corresponding network, the data is split up to several PDOs.
Therefore it cannot be ensured that all data of the variable list is received in one cycle. Parts of the
variable list can be received in different cycles. This is also possible for variables with structure and
array types.

Transmit checksum
This option is not supported.
Acknowledgement
This option is not supported.
Read
The variable values of one (or several) controllers are read.
Write
The variables of this list are transmitted to other controllers.

NOTE
You should only select one of these options for every variable list, i.e. either only read or only write.
If you want to read or write several variables of a project, please use several variable lists (one for
reading, one for writing).
In a network the same variable list should only be exchanged between two participants.

Cyclic transmission
Only valid if [write] is activated. The values are transmitted in the specified [interval] irrespective of
whether they have changed.
Transmit on change
The variable values are only transmitted if one of the values has been changed. With [Minimum gap]
(value > 0) a minimum time between the message packages can be defined.
Transmit on event
If this option is selected, the CAN message is only transmitted if the indicated binary [variable] is set to
TRUE. This variable cannot be selected from the list of the defined variables via the input help.

111
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Particularities for network variables


Device Description
ClassicController: Network variables are only supported on interface 1 (enter the value 0).
CR0020, CR0505
CAN master
ExtendedController: Transmit and receive lists are processed directly.
CR0200 You only have to make the settings described above.
SafetyController: CAN device
CR7020, CR7021, Transmit lists are processed directly.
CR7200, CR7201, For receive lists you must also map the identifier area in the object directory
CR7505, CR7506 to receive PDOs. It is sufficient to create only two receive PDOs and to
assign the first object the first identifier and the second object the last
identifier.
If the network variables are only transferred to one identifier, you only have
to create one receive PDO with this identifier.
Important!
Please note that the identifier of the network variables and of the receive
PDOs must be entered as decimal value.
ClassicController: Network variables are supported on all CAN interfaces.
CR0032 (All other informations as above)
ExtendedController:
CR0232
PDM360 smart: CR1070, Only one interface is available (enter value = 0).
CR1071
CAN master
Transmit and receive lists are processed directly.
You only have to make the settings described above.
CAN device
Transmit lists are processed directly.
For receive lists you must additionally map the identifier area in the object
directory to receive PDOs. It is sufficient to create only two receive PDOs
and to assign the first object the first identifier and the second object the last
identifier.
If the network variables are only transferred to one identifier, you only have
to create one receive PDO with this identifier.
Important!
Please note that the identifier of the network variables and of the receive
PDOs must be entered as decimal value.

112
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Device Description
PDM360: CR1050, Network variables are supported on interface 1 (value = 0) and 2 (value =
CR1051, CR1060 1).
PDM360 compact: CAN master
CR1052, CR1053, Transmit and receive lists are processed directly.
CR1055, CR1056 You only have to make the settings described above.
CAN device
Transmit and receive lists are processed directly.
You only have to make the settings described above.
Important!
If [support network variables] is selected in the PDM360 or PDM360
compact, you must at least create one variable in the global variable list and
call it once in the application program. Otherwise the following error
message is generated when compiling the program:
Error 4601: Network variables 'CAN': No cyclic or freewheeling task for
network variable exchange found.

8.7.6 Information on the EMCY and error codes

Structure of an EMCY message


Under CANopen error states are indicated via a simple standardised mechanism. For a CANopen
device every occurrence of an error is indicated via a special message which details the error.
If an error or its cause disappears after a certain time, this event is also indicated via the EMCY
message. The errors occurred last are stored in the object directory (object 100316) and can be read
via an SDO access (→ function CANx_SDO_READ, → page 139). In addition, the current error
situation is reflected in the error register (object 100116).
A distinction is made between the following errors:
• Communication error
The CAN controller signals CAN errors.
(The frequent occurrence is an indication of physical problems. These errors can
considerably affect the transmission behaviour and thus the data rate of a network.)
Life guarding or heartbeat error
• Application error
Short circuit or wire break
Temperature too high

Structure of an error message


The structure of an error message (EMCY message) is as follows:
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
EMCY error code as object manufacturer-specific information
entered in the object 100116
100316

113
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Identifier
The identifier for the error message consists of the sum of the following elements:
EMCY default identifier 128 (8016)
+
node ID

EMCY error code


It gives detailed information which error occurred. A list of possible error codes has already been
defined in the communication profile. Error codes which only apply to a certain device class are
defined in the corresponding device profile of this device class.

Object 100316 (error field)


The object 100316 represents the error memory of a device. The sub-indices contain the errors
occurred last which triggered an error message.
If a new error occurs, its EMCY error code is always stored in the sub-index 116. All other older errors
are moved back one position in the error memory, i.e. the sub-index is incremented by 1. If all
supported sub-indices are used, the oldest error is deleted. The sub-index 016 is increased to the
number of the stored errors. After all errors have been rectified the value "0" is written to the error field
of the sub-index 116.
To delete the error memory the value "0" can be written to the sub-index 016. Other values must not be
entered.

Signalling of device errors


As described, EMCY messages are transmitted if errors occur in a device. In contrast to
programmable devices error messages are automatically transmitted by decentralised input/output
modules (e.g. CompactModules CR2033).
Corresponding error codes → corresponding device manual.
Programmable devices only generate an EMCY message automatically (e.g. short circuit on an
output) if the function CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 118) or function
CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 131) is integrated in the application program.
Overview of the automatically transmitted EMCY error codes for all ifm devices programmable with
CoDeSys → chapter Overview of the CANopen error codes (→ page 115).
If in addition application-specific errors are to be transmitted by the application program, the function
CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 120) or function
CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 133) are used.

114
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Overview of CANopen error codes


Error Code Meaning
(hex)
00xx Reset or no error
10xx Generic error
20xx Current error
21xx Current, device input side
22xx Current inside the device
23xx Current, device output side
30xx Voltage
31xx Mains voltage
32xx Voltage inside the device
33xx Output voltage error
40xx Temperature error
41xx Ambient temperature error
42xx Device temperature error
50xx Device hardware error
60xx Device software error
61xx Internal software error
62xx User software
63xx Data set error
70xx Additional modules
80xx Monitoring
81xx Communication
8110 CAN overrun – objects lost
8120 CAN in error passive mode
8130 Life guard error or heartbeat error
8140 Recovered from bus off
8150 Transmit COB-ID collision
82xx Protocol error
8210 PDO not processed due to length error
8220 PDO length exceeded
90xx External error
F0xx Additional functions
FFxx Device-specific

115
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Object 100116 (error register)


This object reflects the general error state of a CANopen device. The device is to be considered as
error free if the object 100116 signals no error any more.
Bit Meaning
0 Generic error
1 Current error
2 Voltage error
3 Temperature error
4 Communication error
5 Device profile specific
6 Reserved – always 0
7 Manufacturer specific

Manufacturer specific information


A device manufacturer can indicate additional error information. The format can be freely selected.
Example:
In a device two errors occur and are signalled via the bus:
- Short circuit of the outputs:
Error code 230016,
the value 0316 (0000 00112) is entered in the object 100116
(generic error and current error)
- CAN overrun:
Error code 811016,
the value 1316 (0001 00112) is entered in the object 100116
(generic error, current error and communication error)
>> CAN overrun processed:
Error code 000016,
the value 0316 (0000 00112) is entered in the object 100116
(generic error, current error, communication error reset)
It can be seen only from this information that the communication error is no longer present.

116
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Overview CANopen EMCY codes


All indications for the 1st CAN interface
EMCY code Object Manufacturer-specific information Description
object 100316 100116
Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
00h 21h 03h I0 Diagnosis inputs (bits I0...I7)
00h 31h 05h Terminal voltage VBBo/VBBs
00h 61h 11h Memory error
00h 80h 11h CAN1 monitoring SYNC error (only slave)
00h 81h 11h CAN1 warning threshold (> 96)
10h 81h 11h CAN1 receive buffer overrun
11h 81h 11h CAN1 transmit buffer overrun
30h 81h 11h CAN1 guard/heartbeat error (only slave)

8.7.7 Library for the CANopen master


The library ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB provides a number of functions for the
CANopen master which will be explained below.

117
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
• PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER
CLEAR_ERROR_FIELD ERROR_REGISTER
ERROR_FIELD

Description
Monitoring device-specific error states
The function CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER monitors the device-specific error status of the
master. The function must be called in the following cases:
• the error status is to be transmitted to the network and
• the error messages of the application are to be stored in the object directory.

NOTE
If application-specific error messages are to be stored in the object directory, the function
CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER must be called after (repeatedly) calling the function
CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 120).

118
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CLEAR_ERROR_FIELD BOOL TRUE: deletes the contents of the array ERROR_FIELD
FALSE: function is not executed

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ERROR_REGISTER BYTE Shows the content of the object directory index 1001h
(Error Register).
ERROR_FIELD ARRAY [0...5] OF The array [0...5] shows the contents of the object
WORD directory index 1003h (Error Field).
ERROR_FIELD[0]: number of stored errors.
ERROR_FIELD[1...5]: stored errors, the most recent
error is in index [1].

119
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
• PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY
ENABLE
ERROR
ERROR_CODE
ERROR_REGISTER
MANUFACTURER_ERROR_FIELD

Description
Transmission of application-specific error states.
The function CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY transmits application-specific error states. The
function is called if the error status is to be transmitted to other devices in the network.

NOTE
If application-specific error messages are to be stored in the object directory, the function
CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 118) must be called after (repeatedly) calling the
function CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY.

120
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
ERROR BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
transmits the given error code
TRUE → FALSE (edge)
AND the fault is no longer indicated:
The message that there is no error is sent after a
delay of approx. 1 s
ERROR_CODE WORD The error code provides detailed information about
the detected fault. The values should be entered
according to the CANopen specification.
→ chapter Overview CANopen error codes
(→ page 115)
ERROR_REGISTER BYTE This object reflects the general error state of the
CANopen network participant. The values should be
entered according to the CANopen specification.
MANUFACTURER_ERROR_FIELD ARRAY [0...4] OF Here, up to 5 bytes of application-specific error
BYTE information can be entered. The format can be
freely selected.

121
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example with function CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY

In this example 3 error messages will be generated subsequently:


1. ApplError1, Code = 16#FF00 in the error register 16#81
2. ApplError2, Code = 16#FF01 in the error register 16#81
3. ApplError3, Code = 16#FF02 in the error register 16#81
The function CAN1_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER sends the error messages to the error register
"Object1001h" in the error array "Object1003h".

122
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_MASTER_STATUS
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CANx_MASTER_STATUS
CANOPEN_LED_STATUS NODE_ID
GLOBAL_START BAUDRATE
CLEAR_RX_OVERFLOW_FLAG NODE_STATE
CLEAR_RX_BUFFER SYNC
CLEAR_TX_OVERFLOW_FLAG RX_OVERFLOW
CLEAR_TX_BUFFER TX_OVERFLOW
CLEAR_OD_CHANGED_FLAG OD_CHANGED
CLEAR_ERROR_CONTROL ERROR_CONTROL
RESET_ALL_NODES GET_EMERGENCY
START_ALL_NODES
NODE_STATE_SLAVE
EMERGENCY_OBJECT_SLAVES

Description
Status indication of the device used with CANopen.
The function shows the status of the device used as CANopen master. Furthermore, the status of the
network and of the connected slaves can be monitored.
The function simplifies the use of the CoDeSys CANopen master libraries. We urgently recommend to
carry out the evaluation of the network status and of the error messages via this function.

123
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CANOPEN_LED_STATUS BOOL (input not available for PDM devices)
TRUE: the status LED of the controller is switched to
the mode "CANopen":
flashing frequency 0.5 Hz = preoperational
flashing frequency 2.0 Hz = operational
The other diagnostic LED signals are not changed by
this operating mode.
GLOBAL_START BOOL TRUE: all connected network participants (slaves) are
started simultaneously during network initialisation.
FALSE: the connected network participants are started
one after the other.
Further information → chapter Starting the network with
GLOBAL_START (→ page 96)
CLEAR_RX_OVERFLOW_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete error flag "receive buffer overflow"
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_RX_BUFFER BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete data in the receive buffer
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_TX_OVERFLOW_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete error flag "transmit buffer overflow"
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_TX_BUFFER BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete data in the transmit buffer
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_OD_CHANGED_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete flag "data in the object directory changed"
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_ERROR_CONTROL BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete the guard error list (ERROR_CONTROL)
FALSE: function is not executed
RESET_ALL_NODES BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Reset all nodes
FALSE: function is not executed
START_ALL_NODES BOOL TRUE: All connected network participants (slaves) are
started simultaneously at runtime of the application
program.
FALSE: The connected network participants must be
started one after the other
Further information → chapter Starting the network with
START_ALL_NODES (→ page 97)

124
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Name Data type Description


NODE_STATE_SLAVE ARRAY To determine the status of a single network node the
[0...MAX_NODEI global array "NodeStateList" can be used. The array
NDEX] STRUCT then contains the following elements:
NODE_STATE
• NodeStateList[n].NODE_ID:
node number of the slave
• NodeStateList[n].NODE_STATE:
current status from the master's point of view
• NodeStateList[n].LAST_STATE:
the CANopen status of the node
• NodeStateList[n].RESET_NODE:
TRUE: reset slave
• NodeStateList[n].START_NODE:
TRUE: start slave
• NodeStateList[n].PREOP_NODE:
TRUE: set slave to preoperation mode
• NodeStateList[n].SET_TIMEOUT_STATE:
TRUE: set timeout for cancelling the configuration
• NodeStateList[n].SET_NODE_STATE:
TRUE: set new node status
Example code → chapter Example with function
CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 127)
Further information → chapter Master at runtime
(→ page 91)
EMERGENCY_OBJECT_SLAVES ARRAY To obtain a list of the most recent occurred error
[0...MAX_NODEI messages of all network nodes the global array
NDEX] STRUCT "NodeEmergencyList" can be used. The array then
EMERGENCY_M contains the following elements:
ESSAGE
• NodeEmergencyList[n].NODE_ID:
node number of the slave
• NodeEmergencyList[n].ERROR_CODE:
error code
• NodeEmergencyList[n].ERROR_REGISTER:
error register
• NodeEmergencyList[n].MANUFACTURER_ERRO
R_FIELD[0..4]:
manufacturer-specific error field
Further information → chapter Access to the structures
at runtime of the application (→ page 128)

125
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
NODE_ID BYTE Node ID of the master
BAUDRATE WORD Baud rate of the master
NODE_STATE INT Current status of the master
SYNC BOOL SYNC signal of the master
This is set in the tab [CAN parameters] (→ page 87) of
the master depending on the set time [Com. Cycle
Period].
RX_OVERFLOW BOOL Error flag "receive buffer overflow"
TX_OVERFLOW BOOL Error flag "transmit buffer overflow"
OD_CHANGED BOOL Flag "object directory master was changed"
ERROR_CONTROL ARRAY [0...7] OF BYTE The array contains a list (max. 8) of the missing
network nodes (guard or heartbeat error).
Further information → chapter Access to the structures
at runtime (→ page 128)
GET_EMERGENCY STRUCT At the output the data for the structure
EMERGENY_MESSAGE EMERGENCY_MESSAGE are available.
The most recent error message of a network node is
always displayed.
To obtain a list of all occurred errors, the array
"EMERGENCY_OBJECT_SLAVES" must be
evaluated.

Parameters of internal structures


Below are the structures of the arrays used in this function.
Name Data type Description
CANx_EMERGENY_MESSAGE STRUCT NODE_ID: BYTE
ERROR_CODE: WORD
ERROR_REGISTER: BYTE
MANUFACTURER_ERROR_FIELD: ARRAY[0..4] OF BYTE
The structure is defined by the global variables of the
library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB.
CANx_NODE_STATE STRUCT NODE_ID: BYTE
NODE_STATE: BYTE
LAST_STATE: BYTE
RESET_NODE: BOOL
START_NODE: BOOL
PREOP_NODE: BOOL
SET_TIMEOUT_STATE: BOOL
SET_NODE_STATE: BOOL
The structure is defined by the global variables of the
library
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyzz.LIB.

126
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Detailed description of the functionalities of the CANopen master and the mechanisms → chapter
CANopen master (→ page 85).
Using the controller CR0020 as an example the following code fragments show the use of the function
CANx_MASTER_STATUS (→ page 123).

Example with function CANx_MASTER_STATUS

Slave information
To be able to access the information of the individual CANopen nodes, an array for the corresponding
structure must be generated. The structures are contained in the library. You can see them under
"Data types" in the library manager.
The number of the array elements is determined by the global variable MAX_NODEINDEX which is
automatically generated by the CANopen stack. It contains the number of the slaves minus 1 indicated
in the network configurator.

NOTE
The numbers of the array elements do not correspond to the node ID. The identifier can be read from
the corresponding structure under NODE_ID.

Structure node status

127
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Structure Emergency_Message

Access to the structures at runtime of the application


At runtime you can access the corresponding array element via the global variables of the library and
therefore read the status or EMCY messages or reset the node.

If ResetSingleNodeArray[0].RESET_NODE is set to TRUE for a short time in the example given


above, the first node is reset in the configuration tree.
Further information concerning the possible error codes → chapter Information on the EMCY and error
codes (→ page 113).

128
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7.8 Library for the CANopen slave


The library ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB provides a number of functions for the
CANopen slave (= CANopen device = CANopen node) which will be explained below.

129
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SLAVE_NODEID
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
• PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_SLAVE_NODEID
ENABLE
NODEID

Description
The function CANx_SLAVE_NODEID enables the setting of the node ID of a CAN device (slave) at
runtime of the application program.
Normally, the function is called once during initialisation of the controller, in the first cycle. Afterwards,
the input ENABLE is set to FALSE again.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Set node ID
FALSE: function is not executed
NODEID BYTE Value of the new node number

130
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
• PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER
CLEAR_ERROR_FIELD ERROR_REGISTER
ERROR_FIELD

Description
The function CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER monitors the device-specific error status (device
operated as slave).
The function must be called in the following cases:
• the error status is to be transmitted to the CAN network and
• the error messages of the application are to be stored in the object directory.

NOTE
If application-specific error messages are to be stored in the object directory, the function
CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER must be called after (repeatedly) calling the function
CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY (→ page 133).

131
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CLEAR_ERROR_FIELD BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete ERROR FIELD
FALSE: function is not executed

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ERROR_REGISTER BYTE Shows the contents of the object directory index 1001h
(Error Register).
ERROR_FIELD ARRAY [0...5] OF The array [0...5] shows the contents of the object directory
WORD index 1003h (Error Field):
• ERROR_FIELD[0]: Number of stored errors
• ERROR_FIELD[1...5]: stored errors, the most recent
error is in index [1].

132
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
• PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055, CR1056
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY
ENABLE
ERROR
ERROR_CODE
ERROR_REGISTER
MANUFACTURER_ERROR_FIELD

Description
Using the function CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY application-specific error states are
transmitted. These are error messages which are to be sent in addition to the device-internal error
messages (e.g. short circuit on the output).
The function is called if the error status is to be transmitted to other devices in the network.

NOTE
If application-specific error messages are to be stored in the object directory, the function
CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER (→ page 131) must be called after (repeatedly) calling the function
CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY.

133
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
ERROR BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
transmits the given error code
TRUE → FALSE (edge)
AND the fault is no longer indicated:
The message that there is no error is sent after a
delay of approx. 1 s
ERROR_CODE WORD The error code provides detailed information about
the detected fault. The values should be entered
according to the CANopen specification.
→ chapter Overview of the CANopen error codes
(→ page 115)
ERROR_REGISTER BYTE This object reflects the general error state of the
CANopen network participant. The values should be
entered according to the CANopen specification.
MANUFACTURER_ERROR_FIELD ARRAY [0...4] OF Here, up to 5 bytes of application-specific error
BYTE information can be entered. The format can be
freely selected.

134
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example with function CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY

In this example 3 error messages will be generated subsequently:


1. ApplError1, Code = 16#FF00 in the error register 16#81
2. ApplError2, Code = 16#FF01 in the error register 16#81
3. ApplError3, Code = 16#FF02 in the error register 16#81
The function CAN1_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER sends the error messages to the error register
"Object1001h" in the error array "Object1003h".

135
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SLAVE_STATUS
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CANx_SLAVE_STATUS
CANOPEN_LED_STATUS NODE_ID
CLEAR_RX_OVERFLOW_FLAG BAUDRATE
CLEAR_RX_BUFFER NODE_STATE
CLEAR_TX_OVERFLOW_FLAG SYNC
CLEAR_TX_BUFFER SYNC_ERROR
CLEAR_RESET_FLAGS GUARD_HEARTBEAT_ERROR
CLEAR_OD_CHANGED_FLAG RX_OVERFLOW
TX_OVERFLOW
RESET_NODE
RESET_COM
OD_CHANGED
OD_CHANGED_INDEX

Description
The function CANx_SLAVE_STATUS shows the status of the device used as CANopen slave. The
function simplifies the use of the CoDeSys CAN device libraries. We urgently recommend to carry out
the evaluation of the network status via this function.

Info
For a detailed description of the functions of the CANopen slave and the mechanisms
→ chapter CANopen device (→ page 100).

At runtime you can then access the individual function outputs of the block to obtain a status overview.

136
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example:

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
GLOBAL_START BOOL TRUE: all connected network participants (slaves) are
started simultaneously during network initialisation.
FALSE: the connected network participants are started
one after the other.
Further information → chapter Starting the network with
GLOBAL_START (→ page 96)
CLEAR_RX_OVERFLOW_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete error flag "receive buffer overflow"
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_RX_BUFFER BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete data in the receive buffer
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_TX_OVERFLOW_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete error flag "transmit buffer overflow"
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_TX_BUFFER BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete data in the transmit buffer
FALSE: function is not executed
CLEAR_RESET_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete the flags "nodes reset" and "communications
interface reset".
FALSE: function is not executed

137
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Name Data type Description


CLEAR_OD_CHANGED_FLAG BOOL FALSE → TRUE (edge):
Delete the flags "data in the object directory changed"
and "index position"
FALSE: function is not executed

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
NODE_ID BYTE Node ID of the slave
BAUDRATE WORD Baud rate of the slave
NODE_STATE BYTE Current status of the slave
SYNC BOOL Received SYNC signal of the master
SYNC_ERROR BOOL No SYNC signal of the master received OR: the set
SYNC time (ComCyclePeriod in the master) was
exceeded.
GUARD_HEARTBEAT_ERROR BOOL No guard or heartbeat signal of the master received.
OR: the set times were exceeded.
RX_OVERFLOW BOOL Error flag "receive buffer overflow"
TX_OVERFLOW BOOL Error flag "transmit buffer overflow"
RESET_NODE BOOL The CAN stack of the slave was reset by the master.
This flag can be evaluated by the application and, if
necessary, be used for further reactions.
RESET_COM BOOL The communication interface of the CAN stack was
reset by the master.
This flag can be evaluated by the application and, if
necessary, be used for further reactions.
OD_CHANGED BOOL Flag "object directory master was changed".
OD_CHANGED_INDEX INT The output shows the changed index of the object
directory.

138
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

8.7.9 Further ifm libraries for CANopen


Here we present further ifm functions which are sensible additions for CANopen.

139
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SDO_READ
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB ifm_CANx_SDO_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices: Available for the following devices:
CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303 PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505 PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055,
CR1056
ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
PCB controller: CS0015
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032,
CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_SDO_READ
ENABLE RESULT
NODE LEN
IDX
SUBIDX
DATA

Description
CANx_SDO_READ reads the SDO (→ page 91) with the indicated indexes from the node.
By means of these, the entries in the object directory can be read. So it is possible to selectively read
the node parameters.
ecomatmobile controller PDM360 compact
PCB controller PDM360 dialogue module
PDM360 smart
From the device library From the device library
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB ifm_CANx_SDO_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Prerequisite: Node must be in the mode "Pre- Prerequisite: The node must be in the mode
Operational" or "Operational". "CANopen master" or "CAN device".
For controllers, only CAN1_SDO_READ is
available.

140
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example:

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
NODE BYTE Number of the node
IDX WORD Index in object directory
SUBIDX BYTE Sub-index referred to the index in the object directory
DATA DWORD Address of the receive data array
Permissible length = 0...255
Transmission with ADR operator

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = function inactive
1 = execution of the function completed
2 = function active
3 = function has not been executed
LEN WORD Length of the entry in "number of bytes"
The value for LEN must correspond to the length of the
receive array. Otherwise, problems with SDO communication
will occur.

141
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Function CANx_SDO_WRITE
x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB ifm_CANx_SDO_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices: Available for the following devices:
CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303 PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505 PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053, CR1055,
CR1056
ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
PCB controller: CS0015
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032,
CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CANx_SDO_WRITE
ENABLE RESULT
NODE
IDX
SUBIDX
LEN
DATA

Description
CANx_SDO_WRITE writes the SDO (→ page 91) with the specified indexes to the node.
Using this function, the entries can be written to the object directory. So it is possible to selectively set
the node parameters.
ecomatmobile controller PDM360 compact
PCB controller PDM360 dialogue module
PDM360 smart
From the device library From the device library
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB ifm_CANx_SDO_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Prerequisite: the node must be in the state "Pre- Prerequisite: The node must be in the mode
Operational" or "Operational" and in the mode "CANopen master" or "CAN device".
"CANopen master".
For controllers, there only is CAN1_SDO_WRITE
available.

NOTE
The value for LEN must correspond to the length of the transmit array. Otherwise, problems with SDO
communication will occur.

142
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ifm CANopen library

Example:

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
NODE BYTE number of the node
IDX WORD Index in object directory
SUBIDX BYTE Sub-index referred to the index in the object directory.
LEN WORD Length of the entry in "number of bytes"
The value for LEN must correspond to the length of the
transmit array. Otherwise, problems with SDO communication
will occur.
DATA DWORD Address of the transmit data array
Permissible length = 0...255
Transmission with ADR operator

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Function inactive
1 = Execution of the function stopped
2 = Function active
3 = Function has not been executed

143
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Summary CAN / CANopen

8.8 Summary CAN / CANopen


• The COB ID of the network variables must differ from the CANopen Device ID in the controller
configuration and from the IDs of the functions CANx_TRANSMIT and CANx_RECEIVE!
• If more than 8 bytes of network variables are put into one COB ID, CANopen automatically
expands the data packet to several successive COB IDs. This can lead to conflicts with manually
defined COB IDs!
• Network variables cannot transport any string variables.
• Network variables can be transported...
- if a variable becomes TRUE (Event),
- in case of data changes in the network variable or
- cyclically when the timer has elapsed.
• The interval time is the period between transmissions if cyclical transmission has been selected.
The minimum distance is the waiting time between two transmissions, if the variable changes too
often.
• To reduce the bus load, split the messages via network variables or CANx_TRANSMIT to several
plc cycles using several events.
• Each call of CANx_TRANSMIT or CANx_RECEIVE generates a message packet of 8 bytes.
• In the controller configuration the values for [Com Cycle Period] and [Sync. Window Length]
should be identical. These values must be higher than the plc cycle time.
• If [Com Cycle Period] is selected for a slave, the slave searches for a Sync object of the master
during exactly this period. This is why the value for [Com Cycle Period] must be higher than the
[Master Synch Time].
• We recommend to select "optional startup" for slaves and "automatic startup" for the network. This
reduces unnecessary bus load and allows a briefly lost slave to integrate into the network again.
• Since we have no inhibit timer, we recommend to set analogue inputs to "synchronous
transmission" to avoid bus overload.
• Binary inputs, especially the irregularly switching ones, should best be set to "asynchronous
transmission" using an event timer.
• To be considered during the monitoring of the slave status:
- after the start of the slaves it takes a while until the slaves are operational.
- When the system is switched off, slaves can indicate an incorrect status change due to early
voltage loss.

144
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9 Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939


The CAN interfaces in the ecomatmobile controllers can also be used for communication with special
bus protocols for drive technology and utility vehicles. For these protocols the CAN controller of the
2nd interface is switched to the "extended mode". This means that the CAN messages are transferred
with a 29-bit identifier. Due to the longer identifier numerous messages can be directly assigned to the
identifier.
For writing the protocol this advantage was used and certain messages were combined in ID groups.
The ID assignment is specified in the standards SAE J1939 and ISO 11992. The protocol of
ISO 11992 is based on the protocol of SAE J1939.
Standard Application area
SAE J1939 Drive management
(is possible with this controller)
ISO 11992 Truck & Trailer interface
(requires other hardware because of higher voltage levels)
The 29-bit identifier consists of two parts:
- an 11-bit ID and
- an 18-bit ID.
As for the software protocol the two standards do not differ because ISO 11992 is based on
SAE J1939. Concerning the hardware interface, however, there is one difference: higher voltage level
for ISO 11992. Therefore controllers with a modified CAN interface are required for the communication
of aggregates with the interface ISO 11992.

NOTE
To use the functions to SAE J1939 the protocol description of the aggregate manufacturer (e.g. for
motors, gears) is definitely needed. For the messages implemented in the aggregate control device this
description must be used because not every manufacturer implements all messages or implementation
is not useful for all aggregates.

Table: structure of the identifier


PDU specific
PDU format

destination
Data page
Reserved

Source /

address
Priority

29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
The following information and tools should be available to develop programs for functions to
SAE J1939:
• List of the data to be used by the aggregates
• Overview list of the aggregate manufacturer with all relevant data
• CAN monitor with 29-bit support
• If required, the standard SAE J1939

Example of a detailed message documentation:


ETC1: Electronic Transmission Controller #1 (3.3.5) 0CF0020316

145
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Transmission repetition rate 10 ms


Data length: 8 bytes
PDU format 240
PDU specific 2
Default priority 3
Data page 0
Source address 3
Parameter group number 00F00216
Identifier 0CF0020316
Data field The meaning of the data bytes 1...8 is not further
described. It can be seen from the manufacturer's
documentation.
As in the example of the manufacturer all relevant data has already been prepared, it can be directly
transferred to the functions.
Meaning:
Designation in the Function input library function Example value
manufacturer's documentation
Transmission repetition rate RPT T#10ms
Data length LEN 8
PDU format PF 240
PDU specific PS 2
Default priority PRIO 3
Data page PG 0
Source address / destination SA / DA 3
address
Data field SRC / DST array address
Depending on the required function the corresponding values are used. For the fields SA / DA or SRC
/ DST the meaning (but not the value) changes according to the receive or transmit function.
The individual data bytes must be read from the array and processed according to their meaning.

146
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Example of a short message documentation:


But even if the aggregate manufacturer only provides a short documentation, the function parameters
can be derived from the identifier. In addition to the ID, the "transmission repetition rate" and the
meaning of the data fields are also always needed.
If the protocol messages are not manufacturer-specific, the standard SAE J1939 or ISO 11992 can
also serve as information source.
Structure of the identifier 0CF0020316:
PRIO, reserv., PG PF + PS SA / DA

0 C F 0 0 2 0 3
As these values are hexadecimal numbers of which individual bits are sometimes needed, the
numbers must be further broken down:
SA / DA Source / destination address (hexadecimal) Source / destination address (decimal)

0 3 00 03 0 3

PF PDU format (PF) (hexadecimal) PDU format (PF) (decimal)

F 0 0F 00 16 0

PS PDU specific (PS) (hexadecimal) PDU specific (PS) (decimal)

0 2 00 02 0 2

PRIO, reserv., PG PRIO, reserv., PG (binary)

0 C 0000 1100
Out of the 8 bits (0C16) only the 5 least significant bits are needed:
Not required Priority Res. PG

x x x 02 12 12 02 02
0310 010 010

Further typical combinations for "PG, reserv., PG"


1816:
Not required Priority Res. PG

x x x 12 12 02 02 02
610 010 010

1C16:
Not required Priority Res. PG

x x x 12 12 12 02 02
710 010 010

147
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.1 Function J1939_x


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x
ENABLE
START
MY_ADRESS

Description
J1939_x serves as protocol handler for the communication profile SAE J1939.
To handle the communication, the protocol handler must be called in each program cycle. To do so,
the input ENABLE is set to TRUE.
The protocol handler is started if the input START is set to TRUE for one cycle.
Using MY_ADDRESS, a device address is assigned to the controller. It must differ from the addresses
of the other J1939 bus participants. It can then be read by other bus participants.

NOTE
J1939 communication via the 1st CAN interface: J1939 communication via the 2nd CAN interface:
► First initialise the interface via the function ► Initialise the interface first with the function
CAN1_EXT (→ page 63)! CAN2 (→ page 69)!

148
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
START BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
protocol handler started
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
MY_ADRESS BYTE Device address of the controller

149
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.2 Function J1939_x_RECEIVE


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x_RECEIVE
ENABLE RESULT
CONFIG DEVICE
PG LEN
PF
PS
DST
RPT
LIFE

Description
J1939_x_RECEIVE serves for receiving one individual message or a block of messages.
To do so, the function must be initialised for one cycle via the input CONFIG. During initialisation, the
parameters PG, PF, PS, RPT, LIFE and the memory address of the data array DST are assigned. The
address must be determined via the function ADR.
The receipt of data must be evaluated via the RESULT byte. If RESULT = 1 the data can be read from
the memory address assigned via DST and can be further processed. When a new message is
received, the data in the memory address DST is overwritten.
The number of received message bytes is indicated via the function output LEN.
If RESULT = 3, no valid messages have been received in the indicated time window (LIFE * RPT).

NOTE
This block must also be used if the messages are requested using the functions J1939_..._REQUEST.

150
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
for the configuration of the data object
FALSE: during further processing of the program
PG BYTE Page address (normally = 0)
PF BYTE PDU Format Byte
PS BYTE PDU Specific Byte
DST DWORD Target address of the array in which the received data is
stored
RPT TIME Monitoring time
Within this time window the messages must be received
repeatedly. Otherwise, an error will be signalled.
If no monitoring is requested, RPT must be set to T#0s.
LIFE BYTE Number of permissible faulty monitoring calls

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Not active
1 = Data has been received
3 = Signalling of errors:
Nothing has been received during the time window
(LIFE*RPT)
DEVICE BYTE Device address of the sender
LEN WORD Number of bytes received

151
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.3 Function J1939_x_TRANSMIT


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x_TRANSMIT
ENABLE RESULT
PRIO
PG
PF
PS
SRC
LEN
RPT

Description
J1939_x_TRANSMIT serves for the transmission of messages.
The function is responsible for transmitting individual messages or blocks of messages. To do so, the
parameters PG, PF, PS, RPT and the address of the data array SRC are assigned to the function. The
address must be determined via the function ADR. In addition, the number of data bytes to be
transmitted and the priority (typically 3, 6 or 7) must be assigned.
Given that the transmission of data is processed via several control cycles, the process must be
evaluated via the RESULT byte. All data has been transmitted if RESULT = 1.

Info
If more than 8 bytes are to be sent, a "multi package transfer" is carried out.

152
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
PRIO BYTE Message priority (0...7)
PG BYTE Page address (normally = 0)
PF BYTE PDU Format Byte
PS BYTE PDU Specific Byte
SRC DWORD Memory address of the data array whose content is to be
transmitted
LEN WORD Number of bytes to be transmitted
RPT TIME Repeat time during which the data messages are transmitted
cyclically

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Not active
1 = Data transmission completed
2 = Function active (data transmission)
3 = Error, data cannot be sent

153
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.4 Function J1939_x_RESPONSE


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x_RESPONSE
ENABLE RESULT
CONFIG
PG
PF
PS
SRC
LEN

Description
J1939_x_RESPONSE handles the automatic response to a request message.
This function is responsible for the automatic sending of messages to "Global Requests" and "Specific
Requests". To do so, the function must be initialised for one cycle via the input CONFIG.
The parameters PG, PF, PS, RPT and the address of the data array SRC are assigned to the function.
The address must be determined via the function ADR. In addition, the number of data bytes to be
transmitted is assigned.

154
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
CONFIG BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
for the configuration of the data object
FALSE: during further processing of the program
PG BYTE Page address (normally = 0)
PF BYTE PDU Format Byte
PS BYTE PDU Specific Byte
SRC DWORD Memory address of the data array whose content is to be
transmitted
LEN WORD Number of bytes to be transmitted

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Not active
1 = Data transmission completed
2 = Function active (data transmission)
3 = Error, data cannot be sent

155
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.5 Function J1939_x_SPECIFIC_REQUEST


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x_SPECIFIC_REQUEST
ENABLE RESULT
PRIO LEN
DA
PG
PF
PS
DST

Description
J1939_x_SPECIFIC_REQUEST handles the request and receipt of data from a specific network
participant.
The function is responsible for the automatic requesting of individual messages from a specific J1939
network participant. To do so, the logical device address DA, the parameters PG, PF, PS and the
address of the array DST in which the received data is stored are assigned to the function. The
address must be determined via the function ADR. In addition, the priority (typically 3, 6 or 7) must be
assigned.
Given that the request of data can be handled via several control cycles, this process must be
evaluated via the RESULT byte. All data has been received if RESULT = 1.
The output LEN indicates how many data bytes have been received.

156
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
PRIO BYTE Priority (0...7)
DA BYTE Logical address (target address) of the called device
PG BYTE Page address (normally = 0)
PF BYTE PDU Format Byte
PS BYTE PDU Specific Byte
DST DWORD Target address of the array in which the received data is
stored

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Not active
1 = Data transmission completed
2 = Function active (data transmission)
3 = Error, data cannot be sent
LEN WORD Number of data bytes received

157
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

8.9.6 Function J1939_x_GLOBAL_REQUEST


x = number 1...n of the CAN interface (depending on the device, → data sheet)
Contained in the library:
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

J1939_x_GLOBAL_REQUEST
ENABLE RESULT
PRIO SA
PG LEN
PF
PS
DST

Description
J1939_x_GLOBAL_REQUEST handles global requesting and receipt of data from the network
participants.
The function is responsible for the automatic requesting of individual messages from all (global) active
J1939 network participants. To do so, the logical device address DA, the parameters PG, PF, PS and
the address of the array DST in which the received data is stored are assigned to the function. The
address must be determined via the function ADR. In addition, the priority (typically 3, 6 or 7) must be
assigned.
Given that the request of data can be handled via several control cycles, this process must be
evaluated via the RESULT byte. All data has been received if RESULT = 1.
The output LEN indicates how many data bytes have been received.

158
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

CAN in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
PRIO BYTE Priority (0...7)
PG BYTE Page address (normally = 0)
PF BYTE PDU Format Byte
PS BYTE PDU Specific Byte
DST DWORD Target address of the array in which the received data is
stored

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Not active
1 = Data transmission completed
2 = Function active (data transmission)
3 = Error, data cannot be sent
SA BYTE Logical device address (sender address) of the called device
LEN WORD Number of data bytes received

159
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939

9 PWM in the ecomatmobile controller


PWM signal processing .......................................................................................................... 161
Current control with PWM....................................................................................................... 172
Hydraulic control in PWM ....................................................................................................... 178

In this chapter you will find out more about the pulse width modulation in the controller.
PWM is available in the following controllers:
Number of available of which current- PWM frequency
PWM outputs controlled PWM [Hz]
outputs
ClassicController: CR0032 16 16 2...2000
ClassicController: CR0020, 12 / 8 8/8 25...250
CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0232 32 32 2...2000
ExtendedController: CR0200 24 16 25...250
SmartController: CR2500 4 4 25...250
SafetyController: CR7020, 12 / 8 / 24 8 / 8 / 16 25...250
CR7021, CR7200, CR7201,
CR7505, CR7506
CabinetController: CR0301, 4/8/8 0/0/0 25...250
CR0302, CR0303
PCB controller: CS0015 8 0 25...250
PDM360 smart: CR1070, 4 0 25...250
CR1071

160
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

9.1 PWM signal processing


The abbreviation PWM stands for pulse width modulation. It is mainly used to trigger proportional
valves (PWM valves) for mobile and robust controller applications. Also, with an additional component
(accessory) for a PWM output the pulse-width modulated output signal can be converted into an
analogue output voltage.

UB

15% Ein 85% Aus


ON OFF

UB

70% Ein 30% Aus


ON OFF

Figure: PWM principle

The PWM output signal is a pulsed signal between GND and supply voltage. Within a defined period
(PWM frequency) the mark-to-space ratio is then varied. Depending on the mark-to-space ratio, the
connected load determines the corresponding RMS current.
The PWM function of the ecomatmobile controller is a hardware function provided by the processor.
To use the integrated PWM outputs of the controller, they must be initialised in the application program
and parameterised corresponding to the requested output signal.

9.1.1 PWM functions and their parameters (general)

PWM / PWM1000
Depending on the application and the requested resolution, the function PWM or PWM1000 can be
selected for the application programming. High accuracy and thus resolution is required when using
the control functions. This is why the more technical PWM function is used in this case.
If the implementation is to be kept simple and if there are no high requirements on the accuracy, the
function PWM1000 (→ page 169) can be used. For this function the PWM frequency can be directly
entered in [Hz] and the mark-to-space ratio in steps of 1 ‰.

PWM frequency
Depending on the valve type, a corresponding PWM frequency is required. For the PWM function the
PWM frequency is transmitted via the reload value (function PWM, → page 165) or directly as a
numerical value in [Hz] (function PWM1000, → page 169). Depending on the controller, the PWM
outputs differ in their operating principle but the effect is the same.

161
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

The PWM frequency is implemented by means of an internally running counter, derived from the CPU
pulse. This counter is started with the initialisation of the function PWM. Depending on the PWM
output group (0...3 and / or 4...7 or 4...11), it counts from FFFF16 backwards or from 000016 forwards. If
a transmitted comparison value (VALUE) is reached, the output is set. In case of an overflow of the
counter (change of the counter reading from 000016 to FFFF16 or from FFFF16 to 000016), the output is
reset and the operation restarts.
If this internal counter shall not operate between 000016 and FFFF16, another preset value (RELOAD)
can be transmitted for the internal counter. In doing so, the PWM frequency increases. The
comparison value must be within the now specified range.

PWM channels 0...3


These 4 PWM channels allow the most flexibility for the parameter setting. The PWM channels 0...3
are available in all ecomatmobile controller versions; depending on the type they feature a current
control or not.
For each channel an own PWM frequency (RELOAD value) can be set. There is a free choice
between the function PWM (→ page 165) and the function PWM1000 (→ page 169).

Calculation of the RELOAD value


Wert / Value

0000 FFFF

100% 0%

Reload

Figure: RELOAD value for the PWM channels 0...3

The RELOAD value of the internal PWM counter is calculated on the basis of the parameter DIV64
and the CPU frequency as follows:
ClassicController SmartController
ExtendedController CabinetController (CR0301/CR0302)
SafetyController PCB controller
CabinetController (CR0303)
DIV64 = 0 RELOAD = 20 MHz / fPWM RELOAD = 10 MHz / fPWM
DIV64 = 1 RELOAD = 312.5 kHz / fPWM RELOAD = 156.25 kHz / fPWM
Depending on whether a high or a low PWM frequency is required, the input DIV64 must be set to
FALSE (0) or TRUE (1). In case of frequencies below 305 Hz respectively 152 Hz (according to the
controller), DIV64 must be set to "1" to ensure that the RELOAD value is not greater than FFFF16.

162
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

Calculation examples RELOAD value


ClassicController SmartController
ExtendedController CabinetController (CR0301/CR0302)
SafetyController PCB controller
CabinetController (CR0303)
The PWM frequency shall be 400 Hz. The PWM frequency shall be 200 Hz.

20 MHz 10 MHz
_________ = 50 00010 = C35016 = RELOAD _________ = 50 00010 = C35016 = RELOAD
400 Hz 200 Hz
Thus the permissible range of the PWM value Thus the permissible range of the PWM value
is the range from 000016 to C35016. is the range from 000016 to C35016.
The comparison value at which the output The comparison value at which the output
switches must then be between 000016 and switches must then be between 000016 und
C35016. C35016.

This results in the following mark-to-space ratios:


Mark-to-space ratio Switch-on time Value for mark-to-space ratio
Minimum 0% C35016
Maximum 100 % 000016
Between minimum and maximum triggering 50 000 intermediate values (PWM values) are possible.

PWM channels 4...7 / 8...11


These 4/8 PWM channels can only be set to one common PWM frequency. For programming, the
functions PWM and PWM1000 must not be mixed.
Wert / Value

0000 FFFF

100% 0%

Reload

Figure: RELOAD value for PWM channels 4...7 / 8...11

The RELOAD value of the internal PWM counter is calculated (for all ecomatmobile controllers) on
the basis of the parameters DIV64 and the CPU frequency as follows:
DIV64 = 0 RELOAD = 10 00016 – ( 2.5 MHz / fPWM )
DIV64 = 1 RELOAD = 10 00016 – ( 312.5 kHz / fPWM )
Depending on whether a high or a low PWM frequency is required, the input DIV64 must be set to
FALSE (0) or TRUE (1). In case of PWM frequencies below 39 Hz, DIV64 must be set to "1" to ensure
that the RELOAD value is not smaller than 000016.

163
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

Example:
The PWM frequency shall be 200 Hz.

2.5 MHz
_________ = 12 50010 = 30D416
200 Hz
RELOAD value = 10 00016 – 30D416 = CF2C16
Thus the permissible range of the PWM value is the range from CF2C16 to FFFF16
The comparison value at which the output switches must then be between CF2C16 and FFFF16.

NOTE
The PWM frequency is the same for all PWM outputs (4...7 or 4...11).
The functions PWM and PWM1000 must not be mixed.

This results in the following mark-to-space ratios:


Mark-to-space ratio Switch-on time Value for mark-to-space ratio
Minimum 0% FFFF16
Maximum 100 % CF2C16
Between minimum and maximum triggering 12 500 intermediate values (PWM values) are possible.

NOTE
for ClassicController and ExtendedController applies:
If the PWM outputs 4... 7 are used (regardless of whether current-controlled or via one of the PWM
functions) the same frequency and the corresponding reload value have to be set for the outputs 8...11.
This means that the same functions have to be used for these outputs.

PWM dither
For certain hydraulic valve types a so-called dither frequency must additionally be superimposed on
the PWM frequency. If valves were triggered over a longer period by a constant PWM value, they
could block due to the high system temperatures.
To prevent this, the PWM value is increased or reduced on the basis of the dither frequency by a
defined value (DITHER_VALUE). As a consequence a vibration with the dither frequency and the
amplitude DITHER_VALUE is superimposed on the constant PWM value. The dither frequency is
indicated as the ratio (divider, DITHER_DIVIDER * 2) of the PWM frequency.

164
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

Ramp function
In order to prevent abrupt changes from one PWM value to the next, e.g. from 15 % ON to 70 % ON
(→ figure in PWM signal processing, → page 161), it is possible to delay the increase by using the
function PT1. The ramp function used for PWM is based on the CoDeSys library UTIL.LIB. This
allows a smooth start e.g. for hydraulic systems.

NOTE
When installing the ecomatmobile CD "Software, Tools and Documentation", projects with examples
have been stored in the program directory of your PC:
…\ifm electronic\CoDeSys V…\Projects\DEMO_PLC_CDV… (for controllers) or
…\ifm electronic\CoDeSys V…\Projects\DEMO_PDM_CDV… (for PDMs).
There you also find projects with examples regarding this subject. It is strongly recommended to follow
the shown procedure.
→ chapter ifm demo programs (→ page 25)

NOTE
The PWM function of the controller is a hardware function provided by the processor. The PWM
function remains set until a hardware reset (switching on and off the supply voltage) has been carried
out at the controller.

165
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

9.1.2 Function PWM


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PWM
INIT
RELOAD
DIV64
CHANNEL
VALUE
CHANGE
DITHER_VALUE
DITHER_DIVIDER

Description
PWM is used for initialisation and parameter setting of the PWM outputs.
The function PWM has a more technical background. Due to their structure, PWM values can be very
finely graded. So, this function is suitable for use in controllers.
The function PWM is called once for each channel during initialisation of the application program.
When doing so, input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the parameter RELOAD is also
assigned.

NOTE
The value RELOAD must be identical for the channels 4...7 (for the ClassicController or
ExtendedController: 4...11).
For these channels, the function PWM and function PWM1000 (→ page 169) must not be mixed.
The PWM frequency (and so the RELOAD value) is internally limited to 5 kHz.

Depending on whether a high or a low PWM frequency is required, the input DIV64 must be set to
FALSE (0) or TRUE (1).
During cyclical processing of the program INIT is set to FALSE. The function is called and the new
PWM value is assigned. The value is adopted if the input CHANGE = TRUE.

166
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

Using the function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176) a current measurement for the initialised PWM
channel can be implemented.
PWM_Dither is called once for each channel during initialisation of the application program. When
doing so, input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the DIVIDER for the determination of
the dither frequency and the VALUE are assigned.

Info
The parameters DITHER_FREQUENCY and DITHER_VALUE can be individually set for each channel.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
function PWM is initialised
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
RELOAD WORD Value for the determination of the PWM frequency
(→ chapter Calculation of the RELOAD value, → page 162)
DIV64 BOOL CPU cycle / 64
CHANNEL BYTE Current PWM channel / output
VALUE WORD Current PWM value
CHANGE BOOL TRUE: new PWM value is adopted
FALSE: the changed PWM value has no influence on the
output
DITHER_VALUE WORD Amplitude of the dither value
(→ chapter PWM dither, → page 164)
DITHER_DIVIDER WORD Dither frequency = PWM frequency / DIVIDER * 2

167
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

9.1.3 Function PWM100


IMPORTANT: New ecomatmobile controllers only support the function PWM1000 (→ page 169).
Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200, CR7505
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PWM100
INIT
FREQUENCY
CHANNEL
VALUE
CHANGE
DITHER_VALUE
DITHER_FREQUENCY

Description
PWM100 handles the initialisation and parameter setting of the PWM outputs.
The function enables a simple application of the PWM function in the ecomatmobile controller. The
PWM frequency can be directly indicated in [Hz] and the mark-to-space ratio in steps of 1 %. This
function is not suited for use in controllers, due to the relatively coarse grading.
The function is called once for each channel in the initialisation of the application program. For this, the
input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the parameter FREQUENCY is also assigned.

NOTE
The value FREQUENCY must be identical for the channels 4...7 (for the ClassicController or
ExtendedController: 4...11).
For these channels, the function PWM (→ page 165) and function PWM100 must not be mixed.
The PWM frequency is limited to 5 kHz internally.

During cyclical processing of the program INIT is set to FALSE. The function is called and the new
PWM value is assigned. The value is adopted if the input CHANGE = TRUE.

168
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

A current measurement for the initialised PWM channel can be implemented:


• via the function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176)
• or for example using the ifm unit EC2049 (series element for current measurement).
DITHER is called once for each channel during initialisation of the application program. When doing
so, input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the value FREQUENCY for determining the
dither frequency and the dither value (VALUE) are transmitted.

Info
The parameters DITHER_FREQUENCY and DITHER_VALUE can be individually set for each channel.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
PWM100 is initialised
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
FREQUENCY WORD PWM frequency in [Hz]
CHANNEL BYTE Current PWM channel / output
VALUE BYTE Current PWM value
CHANGE BOOL TRUE: new PWM value is adopted
FALSE: the changed PWM value has no influence on the
output
DITHER_VALUE BYTE Amplitude of the dither value in [%]
DITHER_FREQUENCY WORD Dither frequency in [Hz]

169
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

9.1.4 Function PWM1000


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PWM1000
INIT
FREQUENCY
CHANNEL
VALUE
CHANGE
DITHER_VALUE
DITHER_FREQUENCY

Description
PWM1000 handles the initialisation and parameter setting of the PWM outputs.
The function enables a simple use of the PWM function in the ecomatmobile controller. The PWM
frequency can be directly indicated in [Hz] and the mark-to-space ratio in steps of 1 ‰.
The function is called once for each channel during initialisation of the application program. When
doing so, input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the parameter FREQUENCY is also
assigned.

NOTE
The value FREQUENCY must be identical for the channels 4...7 (for the ClassicController or
ExtendedController: 4...11).
For these channels, the function PWM (→ page 165) and function PWM1000 must not be mixed.
The PWM frequency is limited to 5 kHz internally.

During cyclical processing of the program INIT is set to FALSE. The function is called and the new
PWM value is assigned. The value is adopted if the input CHANGE = TRUE.

170
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller PWM signal processing

A current measurement for the initialised PWM channel can be implemented:


• via the function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176)
• or for example using the ifm unit EC2049 (series element for current measurement).
DITHER is called once for each channel during initialisation of the application program. When doing
so, input INIT must be set to TRUE. During initialisation, the value FREQUENCY for determining the
dither frequency and the dither value (VALUE) are transmitted.

Info
The parameters DITHER_FREQUENCY and DITHER_VALUE can be individually set for each channel.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
PWM1000 is initialised
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
FREQUENCY WORD PWM frequency in [Hz]
CHANNEL BYTE Current PWM channel / output
VALUE BYTE Current PWM value
CHANGE BOOL TRUE: new PWM value is adopted
FALSE: the changed PWM value has no influence on the
output
DITHER_VALUE BYTE Amplitude of the dither value in [%]
DITHER_FREQUENCY WORD Dither frequency in [Hz]

171
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

9.2 Current control with PWM


This device of the ecomatmobile controller family can measure the actually flowing current on certain
outputs and use the signal for further processing. For this purpose ifm electronic provides the user
with some functions.

9.2.1 Current measurement with PWM channels


Current measurement of the coil current can be carried out via the current measurement channels
integrated in the ecomatmobile controller. This allows for example that the current can be re-adjusted
if the coil heats up. Thus the hydraulic conditions in the system remain the same.

NOTICE
Overload protection with ClassicConroller and ExtendedController:
In principle, the current-controlled outputs are protected against short circuit. In the event of overload, in
which the currents are limited by cable lengths and cross sections to for example between 8 A and
20 A, the measuring resistors (shunts) are thermally overloaded.
► Since the maximum permissible current cannot always be preset, the operating mode
OUT_OVERLOAD_PROTECTION should always be selected for the outputs in the application
program. With currents > 4.1 A the respective output is switched off automatically.
> If the output is no longer overloaded, the output is automatically switched on again.
The function OUT_OVERLOAD_PROTECTION is not active in the PWM mode (without current
control)!

NOTE
The following applies to ClassicController and ExtendedController:
The current-control function OCC_TASK (→ page 174) and function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL
(→ page 172) are based on the function PWM (→ page 165). If the current control functions are used,
only the PWM function may be used for channels 8...11. The RELOAD value corresponding to the
frequency must be calculated.

172
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

9.2.2 Function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL
ENABLE PWM_RATIO
INIT
OUTPUT_CHANNEL
ACTUAL_CURRENT
DESIRED_CURRENT
PWM_FREQUENCY
DITHER_FREQUENCY
DITHER_VALUE
MODE
MANUAL

Description
OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL operates as current controller for the PWM outputs.
The controller is designed as an adaptive controller so that it is self-optimising. If this self-optimising
performance is not desired, a value > 0 can be transmitted via the input MANUAL; the self-optimising
performance is then deactivated. The numerical value represents a compensation value, which has an
influence on the integral and differential components of the controller. To determine the best settings
of the controller in the MANUAL mode, the value 50 is suitable. Depending on the requested controller
characteristics the value can then be incremented step-by-step (controller becomes more sensitive /
faster) or decremented (controller becomes less sensitive / slower).
If the function input MANUAL is set to 0, the controller is always self-optimising. The performance of
the controlled system is permanently monitored and the updated compensation values are
automatically and permanently stored in each cycle. Changes in the controlled system are immediately
recognised and corrected.

NOTE
To obtain a stable output value the function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL should be called
cyclically at regular intervals.
If a precise cycle time (5 ms) is required: use function OCC_TASK (→ page 174).
OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL is based on the function PWM (→ page 165).
If OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL is used for the outputs 4...7, only the PWM function may be used
there if the PWM outputs 8...11 are used simultaneously.

173
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
INIT BOOL TRUE (only in the 1st cycle):
function initialised
FALSE: during processing of the program
OUTPUT_CHANNEL BYTE PWM output channel (0...x: values depend on the device)
ACTUAL_CURRENT WORD Actual current of the PWM output in [mA]; the function
OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176) must be called. The
output value of OUTPUT_CURRENT is supplied to the input of
ACTUAL CURRENT.
DESIRED_CURRENT WORD Desired current value in [mA]
PWM_FREQUENCY WORD Permissible PWM frequency for the load connected to the
output
DITHER_FREQUENCY WORD Dither frequency in [Hz]
DITHER_VALUE BYTE Amplitude of the dither value in [%]
MODE BYTE Controller characteristics:
0 = very slow increase, no overshoot
1 = slow increase, no overshoot
2 = minimum overshoot
3 = moderate overshoot permissible
MANUAL BYTE If value > 0, the self-optimising performance of the controller is
overwritten (typ. value: 50)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
PWM_RATIO BYTE For monitoring purposes: display PWM pulse ratio 0...100%

174
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

9.2.3 Function OCC_TASK


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices (NOT for SafetyController):
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200, CR7505

Function symbol:

OCC_TASK
ENABLE PWM_RATIO
INIT
OUTPUT_CHANNEL
DESIRED_CURRENT
PWM_FREQUENCY
DITHER_FREQUENCY
DITHER_VALUE
MODE
MANUAL

Description
OCC_TASK operates as current controller for the PWM outputs.
The controller is designed as an adaptive controller so that it is self-optimising. If the self-optimising
performance is not desired, a value > 0 can be transmitted via the input MANUAL (the self-optimising
performance is deactivated). The numerical value represents a compensation value, which has an
influence on the integral and differential components of the controller. To determine the best settings
of the controller in the MANUAL mode, the value 50 is suitable. Depending on the requested controller
characteristics the value can then be incremented step-by-step (controller becomes more sensitive /
faster) or decremented (controller becomes less sensitive / slower).
If the function input MANUAL is set to 0, the controller is always self-optimising. The performance of
the controlled system is permanently monitored and the updated compensation values are
automatically and permanently stored in each cycle. Changes in the controlled system are immediately
recognised and corrected.

NOTE
OCC_TASK operates with a fixed cycle time of 5 ms. No actual values need to be entered because
these are detected internally by the function.
OCC_TASK is based on the function PWM (→ page 165).
If function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL (→ page 172) is used for the outputs 4...7, only the PWM
function may be used there if the PWM outputs 8...11 are used simultaneously.

175
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
INIT BOOL TRUE (in the 1st cycle):
function initialised
FALSE: during processing of the program
OUTPUT_CHANNEL BYTE PWM output channel (0...x: values depend on the device)
DESIRED_CURRENT WORD Desired current value in [mA]
PWM_FREQUENCY WORD Permissible PWM frequency for the load connected to the
output
DITHER_FREQUENCY WORD Dither frequency in [Hz]
DITHER_VALUE BYTE Amplitude of the dither value in [%]
MODE BYTE Controller characteristics:
0 = very slow increase, no overshoot
1 = slow increase, no overshoot
2 = minimum overshoot
3 = moderate overshoot permissible
MANUAL BYTE If value > 0, the self-optimising performance of the controller is
overwritten (typ. value: 50).

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
PWM_RATIO BYTE For monitoring purposes: display PWM pulse ratio 0...100 %

176
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Current control with PWM

9.2.4 Function OUTPUT_CURRENT


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

OUTPUT_CURRENT
ENABLE ACTUAL_CURRENT
OUTPUT_CHANNEL
DITHER_RELATED

Description
OUTPUT_CURRENT handles the current measurement in conjunction with an active PWM channel.
The function provides the current output current if the outputs are used as PWM outputs. The current
measurement is carried out in the device, i.e. no external measuring resistors are required.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed.
FALSE: function is not executed
OUTPUT_CHANNEL BYTE PWM output channel (0...x: values depend on the device)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ACTUAL_CURRENT WORD Output current in [mA].

177
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3 Hydraulic control in PWM


ifm electronic offers the user special functions to control hydraulic systems as a special field of
current regulation with PWM.

9.3.1 The purpose of this library? – An introduction


Thanks to the functions of this library you can fulfil the following tasks:

Standardise the output signals of a joystick


It is not always intended that the whole movement area of the joy stick influences the movement of the
machine.
Often the area around the neutral
position of the joy stick is to be spared
because the joy stick does not reliably
supply 0 V in this neutral position.
Here in this figure the area between
XL- and XL+ is to be spared.

The functions of this library enable


you to adapt the characteristic curve
of your joy stick according to your
requirements – on request even freely
configurable:

178
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Control hydraulic valves with current-controlled outputs


As a rule hydraulic valves do not have a completely linear characteristic:
Typical characteristic curve of a
hydraulic valve:
The oil flow starts at approx. 20 % of
the coil current. The initial oil flow is
not linear.
This has to be taken into account for
the calculation of the preset values for
the coil current. The functions of this
library support you here.

9.3.2 What does a PWM output do?


PWM stands for "pulse width modulation" which means the following principle:
In general, digital outputs provide a fixed output voltage as soon as they are switched on. The value of
the output voltage cannot be changed here. The PWM outputs, however, split the voltage into a quick
sequence of many square-wave pulse trains. The pulse duration [switched on] / pulse duration
[switched off] ratio determines the effective value of the requested output voltage. This is referred to as
the switch-on time in [%].

Info
In the following sketches the current profiles are shown as a stylised straight line. In reality the current
flows to an e-function.

Figure: The profile of the PWM voltage U and the coil current I at 10 % switch-on time:
The effective coil current Ieff is also 10 %

Figure: The profile of the PWM voltage U and the coil current I at 50 % switch-on time:
The effective coil current Ieff is also 50 %

179
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Figure: The profile of the PWM voltage U and the coil current I at 100 % switch-on time:
The effective coil current Ieff is also 100 %

9.3.3 What is the dither?


If a proportional hydraulic valve is controlled, its piston does not move right away and at first not
proportional to the coil current. Due to this "slip stick effect" – a kind of "break-away torque" – the valve
needs a slightly higher current at first to generate the power it needs to move the piston from its off
position. The same also happens for each other change in the position of the valve piston. This effect
is reflected in a jerking movement, especially at very low manipulating speeds.
Technology solves this problem by having the valve piston move slightly back and forth (dither). The
piston is continuously vibrating and cannot "stick". Also a small change in position is now performed
without any delay, a "running start" so to speak.
Advantage: The hydraulic cylinder controlled in that way can be moved more sensitively.
Disadvantage: The valve becomes measurably hotter with dither than without because the valve coil is
now working continuously.
That means that the "golden means" has to be found.

When is a dither useful?


When the PWM output provides a pulse frequency that is small enough (standard value: up to 250 Hz)
so that the valve piston continuously moves at a minimum stroke, an additional dither is not required
(→ next figure):

Figure: Balanced PWM signal; no dither required.

180
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

At a higher PWM frequency (standard value 250 Hz up to 1 kHz) the remaining movement of the valve
piston is so short or so slow that this effectively results in a standstill so that the valve piston can again
get stuck in its current position (and will do so!) (→ next figures):

Figure: A high frequency of the PWM signal results in an almost direct current in the coil. The valve piston does not move
enough any longer. With each signal change the valve piston has to overcome the break-away torque again.

Figure: Too low frequencies of the PWM signal only allow rare, jerking movements of the valve piston. Each pulse moves the
valve piston again from its off position; every time the valve piston has to overcome the break-away torque again.

NOTE
With a switch-on time below 10 % and above 90 % the dither does not have any measurable effect any
longer. In such cases it makes sense and it is necessary to superimpose the PWM signal with a dither
signal.

Dither frequency and amplitude


The mark/space ratio (the switch-on time) of the PWM output signal is switched with the dither
frequency. The dither amplitude determines the difference of the switch-on times in the two dither half-
waves.

NOTE
The dither frequency must be an integer part of the PWM frequency. Otherwise the hydraulic system
would not work evenly but it would oscillate.

181
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Example Dither
The dither frequency is 1/8 of the PWM frequency.
The dither amplitude is 10 %.
With the switch-on time of 50 % in the figure, the actual switch-on time for 4 pulses is 60 % and for the
next 4 pulses it is 40 % which means an average of 50 % switch-on time. The resulting effective coil
current will be 50 % of the maximum coil current.

The result is that the valve piston always oscillates around its off position to be ready to take a new
position with the next signal change without having to overcome the break-away torque before.

9.3.4 Functions of the library


"ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib"
The library ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib contains the following functions:
• Function CONTROL_OCC (→ page 183) *)
This function uses the function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL (→ page 172) and the function
OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176) from the library ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.Lib.
• Function JOYSTICK_0 (→ page 186)
• Function JOYSTICK_1 (→ page 190)
• Function JOYSTICK_2 (→ page 194)
• Function NORM_HYDRAULIC (→ page 196)
* OCC stands for Output Current Control.

The following functions are needed from the library UTIL.Lib (in the CoDeSys®package):
• Function RAMP_INT
• Function CHARCURVE
These functions are automatically activated by the functions of
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib and configured.

The following packages are needed from the library ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.Lib:


• Function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176)
• Function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL (→ page 172)
• Function OCC_TASK (→ page 174)
These functions (→ chapter PWM signal processing (→ page 161)) are automatically activated and
configured by the functions of ifm _HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib.

182
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3.5 Function CONTROL_OCC


Contained in the library:
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

CONTROL_OCC
ENABLE DESIRED_CURRENT
INIT ACTUAL_CURRENT
R_RAMP BREAK
F_RAMP SHORT
TIMEBASE
X
XH
XL
MAX_CURRENT
MIN_CURRENT
TOLERANCE
CHANNEL
PWM_FREQUENCY
DITHER_FREQUENCY
DITHER_VALUE
MODE
MANUAL

Description
CONTROL_OCC scales the input value X to a specified current range.
Each instance of the function is called once in each PLC cycle. The function uses the function
OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL (→ page 172) and function OUTPUT_CURRENT (→ page 176)
from the library ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.Lib. The controller is designed as an adaptive controller so
that it is self-optimising.
If this self-optimising performance is not desired, a value > 0 can be transferred via the input
MANUAL: → the self-optimising performance is deactivated.
The numerical value in MANUAL represents a compensation value, which has an influence on the
integral and differential components of the controller. To determine the best settings of the controller in
the MANUAL mode, the value 50 is suitable.
Increase the value MANUAL: → controller becomes more sensitive / faster
Decrease the value MANUAL: → controller becomes less sensitive / slower

183
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

If the function input MANUAL is set to "0", the controller is always self-optimising. The performance of
the controlled system is permanently monitored and the updated compensation values are
automatically and permanently stored in each cycle. Changes in the controlled system are immediately
recognised and corrected.

Info
Input X of the function CONTROL_OCC should be supplied by the output of the JOYSTICK functions.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed.
FALSE: function is not executed.
INIT BOOL TRUE: function is initialised, 1st cycle.
FALSE: during processing of the program.
R_RAMP INT Rising edge of the ramp
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
F_RAMP INT Falling edge of the ramp in
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
TIMEBASE TIME Reference for rising / falling edge of the ramp:
t#0s = rising / falling edge in [increments/PLC cycle]
else = rising / falling edge in [increments/TIMEBASE]
X WORD Input value in [increments].
Standardised by function NORM_HYDRAULIC.
XH WORD Max. input value in [increments].
XL WORD Min. input value in [increments].
MAX_CURRENT WORD Max. valve current in [mA].
MIN_CURRENT WORD Min. valve current in [mA].
TOLERANCE BYTE Tolerance for min. valve current in [mA].
When the tolerance is exceeded, jump to MIN_CURRENT is
effected.
CHANNEL BYTE 0...x PWM output channel (values depend on the device).
PWM_FREQUENCY WORD PWM frequency for the connected valve in [Hz].
DITHER_FREQUENCY WORD Dither frequency in [Hz].
DITHER_VALUE BYTE Amplitude of the dither value in [%] of MAX_CURRENT.
MODE BYTE Controller characteristics:
0 = very slow increase, no overshoot
1 = slow increase, no overshoot
2 = minimum overshoot
3 = moderate overshoot permissible

184
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Name Data type Description


MANUAL BYTE Value = 0: the controller operates in a self-optimising way.
Value > 0: the self-optimising performance of the controller is
overwritten (typical: 50).

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
DESIRED_CURRENT WORD Desired current value in [mA] for OCC
(for monitoring purposes)
ACTUAL_CURRENT WORD Actual current on the PWM output in [mA]
(for monitoring purposes)
BREAK BOOL Error: wire to the valve interrupted
SHORT BOOL Error: short-circuit in the wire to the valve

185
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3.6 Function JOYSTICK_0


Contained in the library:
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

JOYSTICK_0
X OUT1
XH_POS OUT2
XL_POS OUT3
XH_NEG WRONG_MODE
XL_NEG ERR1
MODE ERR2

Description
JOYSTICK_0 scales signals from a joystick to clearly defined characteristic curves, standardised
to 0...1000.
For this function the characteristic curve values are specified (→ figures):
• Rising edge of the ramp = 5 increments/PLC cycle
• Falling edge of the ramp = no edge

The parameters XL_POS (XL+),


XH_POS (XH+), XL_NEG (XL-) and
XH_NEG (XH-) are used to evaluate
the joystick movements only in the
requested area.
The values for the positive and
negative area may be different.
The values for XL_NEG and XH_NEG
are negative here.

186
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Mode 0:
characteristic curve linear for the
range XL to XH

Mode 1:
Characteristic curve linear with dead
band
Values fixed to:
Dead band:
0…10% of 1000 increments

Mode 2:
2-step linear characteristic curve with
dead band
Values fixed to:
Dead band:
0…10% of 1000 increments
Step:
X = 50 % of 1000 increments
Y = 20 % of 1000 increments

Characteristic curve mode 3:


Curve rising (line is fixed)

187
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X INT Preset value input in [increments].
XH_POS INT Max. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_POS INT Min. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XH_NEG INT Max. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_NEG INT Min. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
MODE BYTE Mode selection characteristic curve:
0 = linear
(0|0 – 1000|1000)
1 = linear with dead band
(0|0 – 100|0 – 1000|1000)
2 = 2-step linear with dead band
(0|0 – 100|0 – 500|200 – 1000|1000)
3 = curve rising

188
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
OUT1 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve left
OUT2 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve right
OUT3 INT Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve on output module
(e.g. CR2011 or CR2031)
WRONG_MODE BOOL Error: invalid mode
ERR1 BYTE Error code for rising edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array
ERR2 BYTE Error code for falling edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array

189
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3.7 Function JOYSTICK_1


Contained in the library:
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

JOYSTICK_1
X OUT1
XH_POS OUT2
XL_POS OUT3
XH_NEG WRONG_MODE
XL_NEG ERR1
R_RAMP ERR2
F_RAMP
TIMEBASE
MODE
DEAD_BAND
CHANGE_POINT_X
CHANGE_POINT_Y

Description
JOYSTICK_1 scales signals from a joystick to configurable characteristic curves, standardised to
0...1000.
For this function the characteristic curve values can be configured (→ figures):
Mode 0:
Linear characteristic curve
100 % = 1000 increments

190
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Mode 1:
Characteristic curve linear with dead
band
Value for the dead band (DB) can be
set in % of 1000 increments
100 % = 1000 increments
DB = Dead_Band

Mode 2:
2-step linear characteristic curve with
dead band
Values can be configured to:
Dead band:
0…DB in % of 1000 increments
Step:
X = CPX in % of 1000 increments
Y= CPY in % of 1000 increments
100 % = 1000 increments
DB = Dead_Band
CPX = Change_Point_X
CPY = Change_Point_Y
Characteristic curve mode 3:
Curve rising (line is fixed)

191
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X INT Preset value input in [increments].
XH_POS INT Max. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_POS INT Min. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XH_NEG INT Max. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_NEG INT Min. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
R_RAMP INT Rising edge of the ramp
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
F_RAMP INT Falling edge of the ramp in
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
TIMEBASE TIME Reference for rising / falling edge of the ramp:
t#0s = rising / falling edge in [increments/PLC cycle]
else = rising / falling edge in [increments/TIMEBASE]
MODE BYTE Mode selection characteristic curve:
0 = linear
(0|0 – 1000|1000)
1 = linear with dead band (DB)
(0|0 – DB…|0 – 1000|1000)
2 = 2-step linear with dead band (DB)
(0|0 – DB|0 – CPX|CPY – 1000|1000)
3 = curve rising
DEAD_BAND BYTE Adjustable dead band (DB) in [% of 1000 increments].
CHANGE_POINT_X BYTE For mode 2: ramp step, value for X in [% of 1000 increments].
CHANGE_POINT_Y BYTE For mode 2: ramp step, value for Y in [% of 1000 increments].

192
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
OUT1 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve left
OUT2 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve right
OUT3 INT Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve on output module
(e.g. CR2011 or CR2031)
WRONG_MODE BOOL Error: invalid mode
ERR1 BYTE Error code for rising edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array
ERR2 BYTE Error code for falling edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array

193
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3.8 Function JOYSTICK_2


Contained in the library:
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.Lib
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

JOYSTICK_2
X OUT1
XH_POS OUT2
XL_POS OUT3
XH_NEG ERR1
XL_NEG ERR1
R_RAMP
F_RAMP
TIMEBASE
VARIABLE_GAIN
N_POINT

Description
JOYSTICK_2 scales the signals from a joystick to a configurable characteristic curve. Free selection of
the standardisation.
For this function, the characteristic curve is freely configurable (→ figure):
Characteristic curve freely
configurable

194
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X INT Preset value input in [increments].
XH_POS INT Max. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_POS INT Min. preset value positive direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XH_NEG INT Max. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
XL_NEG INT Min. preset value negative direction in [increments]
(negative values also permissible).
R_RAMP INT Rising edge of the ramp
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
F_RAMP INT Falling edge of the ramp in
in [increments/PLC cycle] or [increments/TIMEBASE].
0 = without ramp
TIMEBASE TIME Reference for rising and falling edge of the ramp:
t#0s = rising / falling edge in [increments/PLC cycle]
else = rising / falling edge in [increments/TIMEBASE]
VARIABLE_GAIN ARRAY [0..10] Pairs of values describing the curve
OF POINT
The first pairs of values indicated in N_POINT are used.
N = 2…11
Example: 9 pairs of values declared as variable VALUES:
VALUES: ARRAY[0..10] OF POINT :=
(X:=0,Y:=0),(X:=200,Y:=0), (X:=300,Y:=50), (X:=400,Y:=100),
(X:=700,Y:=500), (X:=1000,Y:=900), (X:=1100,Y:=950),
(X:=1200,Y:=1000), (X:=1400,Y:=1050);
There may be blanks between the values.
N_POINT BYTE Number of points (pairs of values in VARIABLE_GAIN) by
which the curve characteristic is defined. N = 2…11

195
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
OUT1 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve left
OUT2 WORD Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve right
OUT3 INT Standardised output value
pairs of values 0 to 10 [increments]
e.g. for valve on output module
(e.g. CR2011 or CR2031)
ERR1 BYTE Error code for rising edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array
ERR2 BYTE Error code for falling edge:
0 = no error
1 = error in array: wrong sequence
2 = initial value IN not contained in value range of array
4 = invalid number N for array

196
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

9.3.9 Function NORM_HYDRAULIC


Contained in the library:
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS04_Vxxyyzz.LIB ifm_HYDRAULIC_32bit_Vxxyyzz.LIB
ifm_HYDRAULIC_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices: Available for the following devices:
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505 ClassicController: CR0032
ExtendedController: CR0200 ExtendedController: CR0232
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200,
CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

NORM_HYDRAULIC
X Y
XH X_OUT_OF_RANGE
XL
YH
YL

Description
NORM_HYDRAULIC standardises input values with fixed limits to values with new limits.
Please note: This function corresponds to the 3S function NORM_DINT from the CoDeSys library
UTIL.Lib.
The function standardises a value of type DINT within the limits of XH and XL to an output value within
the limits of YH and YL.
Due to rounding errors deviations from the standardised value of 1 may occur. If the limits (XH/XL or
YH/YL) are indicated in inversed form, standardisation is also inverted.
If X outside the limits XL…XH, the error message X_OUT_OF_RANGE = TRUE.

Typical characteristic curve of a


hydraulic valve:
The oil flow will not start before 20% of
the coil current has been reached.
At first the oil flow is not linear.

197
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Characteristics of the function

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X DINT Desired value input
XH DINT Max. input value [increments]
XL DINT Min. input value [increments]
YH DINT Max. output value [increments], e.g.:
valve current [mA] / flow [l/min]
YL DINT Min. output value [increments], e.g.:
valve current [mA] / flow [l/min]

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y DINT Standardised output value
X_OUT_OF_RANGE BOOL Error: X is beyond the limits XH and XL

198
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

PWM in the ecomatmobile controller Hydraulic control in PWM

Examples NORM_HYDRAULIC
Parameter Case 1 Case 2 Case 3
Upper limit value input XH 100 100 2000
Lower limit value input XL 0 0 0
Upper limit value output YH 2000 0 100
Lower limit value output YL 0 2000 0
Non standardised value X 20 20 20
Standardised value Y 400 1600 1
Case 1:
Input with relatively coarse resolution.
Output with high resolution.
1 X increment results in 20 Y increments.
Case 2:
Input with relatively coarse resolution.
Output with high resolution.
1 X increment results in 20 Y increments.
Output signal is inverted as compared to the input signal.
Case 3:
Input with high resolution.
Output with relatively coarse resolution.
20 X increments result in 1 Y increment.

199
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10 More functions in the ecomatmobile


controller
Counter functions for frequency and period measurement .................................................... 200
Software reset......................................................................................................................... 215
Saving, reading and converting data in the memory .............................................................. 216
Data access and data check .................................................................................................. 223
Processing interrupts .............................................................................................................. 232
Use of the serial interface....................................................................................................... 239
Reading the system time ........................................................................................................ 246
Processing analogue input values.......................................................................................... 248
Adapting analogue values ...................................................................................................... 253

In this chapter you will find more functions that you can use in the ecomatmobile controller.

10.1 Counter functions for frequency and period


measurement
Depending on the controller up to 16 fast inputs are supported which can process input frequencies of
up to 30 kHz. Further to the pure frequency measurement at the inputs FRQ, the inputs ENC can be
also used to evaluate incremental encoders (counter function) with a maximum frequency of 10 kHz.
The inputs CYL are used for period measurement of slow signals.
Input Frequency [kHz] Description
FRQ 0 / ENC 0 30 / 10 frequency measurement / encoder 1, channel A
FRQ 1 / ENC 0 30 / 10 frequency measurement / encoder 1, channel B
FRQ 2 / ENC 1 30 / 10 frequency measurement / encoder 2, channel A
FRQ 3 / ENC 1 30 / 10 frequency measurement / encoder 2, channel B
CYL 0 / ENC 2 10 period measurement / encoder 3, channel A
CYL 1 / ENC 2 10 period measurement / encoder 3, channel B
CYL 2 / ENC 3 10 period measurement / encoder 4, channel A
CYL 3 / ENC 3 10 period measurement / encoder 4, channel B
The following functions are available for easy evaluation:

200
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.1 Applications
It must be taken into account that the different measuring methods can cause errors in the frequency
detection.
The function FREQUENCY (→ page 201) is suitable for frequencies between 100 Hz and 30 kHz; the
error decreases at high frequencies.
The function PERIOD (→ page 203) carries out a period measurement. It is thus suitable for
frequencies lower than 1000 Hz. In principle it can also measure higher frequencies, but this has a
significant impact on the cycle time. This must be taken into account when setting up the application
software.

10.1.2 Use as digital inputs


If the fast inputs (FRQx / CYLx) are used as "normal" digital inputs, the increased sensitivity to
interfering pulses must be taken into account (e.g. contact bouncing for mechanical contacts). The
standard digital input has an input frequency of 50 Hz. If necessary, the input signal must be
debounced by means of the software.

201
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.3 Function FREQUENCY


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
(For safety signals use function SAFE_FREQUENCY_OK together with function PERIOD,
→ page 203!)
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

FREQUENCY
INIT F
CHANNEL
TIMEBASE

Description
FREQUENCY measures the signal frequency at the indicated channel. Maximum input frequency
→ data sheet.
This function measures the frequency of the signal at the selected CHANNEL. To do so, the positive
edge is evaluated. Depending on the TIMEBASE, frequency measurements can be carried out in a
wide value range. High frequencies require a short time base, low frequencies a correspondingly
longer time base. The frequency is provided directly in [Hz].

NOTE
For the function FREQUENCY only the inputs FRQ0...FRQ3 can be used.

202
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function initialised.
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program.
CHANNEL BYTE Number of the input (0...x value depending on the device).
TIMEBASE TIME Time base.

NOTE
The function may provide wrong values before initialisation. Do not evaluate the output before the
function has been initialised.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
F REAL frequency in [Hz].

203
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.4 Function PERIOD


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
(For safety signals use function SAFE_FREQUENCY_OK together with function FREQUENCY,
→ page 201!)
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

PERIOD
INIT C
CHANNEL F
PERIODS ET

Description
PERIOD measures the frequency and the cycle period (cycle time) in [µs] at the indicated channel.
Maximum input frequency → data sheet.
This function measures the frequency and the cycle time of the signal at the selected CHANNEL. To
calculate, all positive edges are evaluated and the average value is determined by means of the
number of indicated PERIODS.
In case of low frequencies there will be inaccuracies when using the function FREQUENCY. To avoid
this, the function PERIOD can be used. The cycle time is directly indicated in [µs].
The maximum measuring range is approx. 71 min.

NOTE
For the function PERIOD only the inputs CYL0...CYL3 can be used.
Frequencies < 0.5 Hz are no longer clearly indicated!

204
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function initialised
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
CHANNEL BYTE Number of the input (0...x value depending on the device)
PERIODS BYTE Number of periods to be compared

NOTE
The function may provide wrong values before initialisation. Do not evaluate the output before the
function has been initialised.
We urgently recommend to initialise all required instances of this function at the same time. Otherwise,
wrong values may be provided.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
C DWORD Cycle time of the detected periods in [μs].
F REAL Frequency of the detected periods in [Hz].
ET TIME Time elapsed since the beginning of the period measurement
(can be used for very slow signals).

205
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.5 Function PERIOD_RATIO


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

PERIOD_RATIO
INIT C
CHANNEL F
PERIODS ET
RATIO1000

Description
PERIOD_RATIO measures the frequency and the cycle period (cycle time) in [µs] during the indicated
periods at the indicated channel. In addition, the mark-to-space ratio is indicated in per mill. Maximum
input frequency → data sheet.
This function measures the frequency and the cycle time of the signal at the selected CHANNEL. To
calculate, all positive edges are evaluated and the average value is determined by means of the
number of indicated PERIODS. In addition, the mark-to-space ratio is indicated in [‰].
For example: In case of a signal ratio of 25 ms high level and 75 ms low level the value RATIO1000 is
provided as 250 ‰.
In case of low frequencies there will be inaccuracies when using the function FREQUENCY. To avoid
this, the function PERIOD_RATIO can be used. The cycle time is directly indicated in [µs].
The maximum measuring range is approx. 71 min.

NOTE
For the function PERIOD_RATIO only the inputs CYL0...CYL3 can be used.
The output RATIO1000 provides the value 0 for a mark-to-space ratio of 100 % (input signal
permanently at supply voltage).
Frequencies < 0.05 Hz are no longer clearly indicated!

206
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function initialised
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program
CHANNEL BYTE Number of the input (0...x value depending on the device)
PERIODS BYTE Number of periods to be compared

NOTE
The function may provide wrong values before initialisation. Do not evaluate the output before the
function has been initialised.
We urgently recommend to initialise all required instances of this function at the same time. Otherwise,
wrong values may be provided.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
C DWORD Cycle time of the detected periods in [μs].
F REAL Frequency of the detected periods in [Hz].
ET TIME Time elapsed since the beginning of the last change in state of
the input signal (can be used for very slow signals).
RATIO1000 WORD mark-to-space ratio in [‰].

207
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.6 Function PHASE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

PHASE
INIT C
CHANNEL P
ET

Description
PHASE reads a pair of channels with fast inputs and compares the phase position of the signals.
Maximum input frequency → data sheet.
This function compares a pair of channels with fast inputs so that the phase position of two signals
towards each other can be evaluated. An evaluation of the cycle period is possible even in the range
of seconds.

NOTE
For frequencies lower than 15 Hz a cycle period or phase shift of 0 is indicated.

208
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function is initialised
FALSE: during processing of the program
CHANNEL BYTE Channel pair 0 or 1

NOTE
The function may provide wrong values before initialisation. Do not evaluate the output before the
function has been initialised.
We urgently recommend to program an own instance of this function for each channel to be evaluated.
Otherwise, wrong values may be provided.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
C DWORD Cycle period in [μs].
P INT Angle of the phase shift (0...360 °).
ET TIME Time elapsed since the beginning of the period measurement
(can be used for very slow signals).

209
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.7 Function INC_ENCODER


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

INC_ENCODER
INIT COUNTER
CHANNEL UP
PRESET_VALUE DOWN
PRESET
RESOLUTION

Description
INC_ENCODER handles up/down counter functions for the evaluation of encoders.
The function is designed as up/down counter. Two frequency inputs form the input pair which is
evaluated by means of the function. The following table shows the permissible limit frequencies and
the max. number of incremental encoders that can be connected:
Device Limit frequency max. number of encoders
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505 10 kHz 4
ClassicController: CR0032 30 kHz 8
ExtendedController: CR0200 10 kHz 8
ExtendedController: CR0232 30 kHz 16
SmartController: CR2500 10 kHz 2
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7505 10 kHz 4
ExtendedSafetyController: CR7200 10 kHz 8
SafetyController: CR7021, CR7506 10 kHz 4
ExtendedSafetyController: CR7201 10 kHz 8
CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303 10 kHz 2
PCB controller: CS0015 0.5 kHz 2
PDM360 smart: CR1071 1 kHz 2

210
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

NOTE
Depending on the further load on the unit the limit frequency might fall when "many" encoders are
evaluated.
If the load is too high the cycle time can get unacceptably long (→ system resources, → page 42).

Via PRESET_VALUE the counter can be set to a preset value. The value is adopted if PRESET is set
to TRUE. Afterwards, PRESET must be set to FALSE again for the counter to become active again.
The current counter value is available at the output COUNTER. The outputs UP and DOWN indicate
the current counting direction of the counter. The outputs are TRUE if the counter has counted in the
corresponding direction in the preceding program cycle. If the counter stops, the direction output in the
following program cycle is also reset.
On input RESOLUTION the resolution of the encoder can be evaluated in multiples:
1 = normal resolution (identical with the resolution of the encoder),
2 = double evaluation of the resolution,
4 = 4-fold evaluation of the resolution.
All other values on this input mean normal resolution.
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 RESOLUTION = 1
A In the case of normal resolution only the falling
2 4 2 4 2 4 2
edge of the B-signal is evaluated.
B
v v v
+1 +1 +1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
RESOLUTION = 2
A
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 In the case of double resolution the falling and the
B rising edges of the B-signal are evaluated.

v v v v v v v
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
A RESOLUTION = 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In the case of 4-fold resolution the falling and the
B rising edges of the A-signal and the B-signal are
evaluated.
v v v v v v v
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
v v v v v v v
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1

211
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function initialised.
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program.
CHANNEL BYTE Number of the input pair (0...3).
PRESET_VALUE DINT Preset value of the counter.
PRESET BOOL TRUE: preset value is adopted.
FALSE: counter active.
RESOLUTION BYTE Factor of the encoder resolution (1, 2, 4):
1 = normal resolution
2 = double resolution
4 = 4-fold resolution
All other values count as "1".

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
COUNTER DINT Current counter value.
UP BOOL TRUE: counter counts upwards.
FALSE: counter stands still.
DOWN BOOL TRUE: counter counts downwards.
FALSE: counter stands still.

212
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

10.1.8 Function FAST_COUNT


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

FAST_COUNT
ENABLE CV
INIT
CHANNEL
MODE_UP_DOWN
LOAD
PV

Description
FAST_COUNT operates as counter block for fast input pulses.
This function detects fast pulses at the FRQ input channels 0...3. With the FRQ input channel 0
FAST_COUNT operates like the block CTU. Maximum input frequency → data sheet.

NOTE
For the ecomatmobile controllers channel 0 can only be used as up counter. The channels 1...3 can
be used as up and down counters.

213
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Counter functions for frequency and period measurement

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed, starting from the start value.
FALSE: function is not executed.
INIT BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
function initialised.
FALSE: during cyclical processing of the program.
CHANNEL BYTE number of the input (0...3).
MODE_UP_DOWN BOOL TRUE: counter counts downwards.
FALSE: counter counts upwards.
LOAD BOOL TRUE: start value PV being loaded.
FALSE: start value "0" being loaded.
PV WORD Start value (preset value).

NOTE
After setting the parameter ENABLE the counter counts as from the indicated start value.
The counter does NOT continue from the value which was valid at the last deactivation of ENABLE.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
CV WORD output value of the counter.

214
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Software reset

10.2 Software reset


Using this function the control can be restarted via an order in the application program.

10.2.1 Function SOFTRESET


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SOFTRESET
ENABLE

Description
SOFTRESET leads to a complete reboot of the controller.
The function can for example be used in conjunction with CANopen if a node reset is to be carried out.
The behaviour of the controller after a SOFTRESET corresponds to that after switching the supply
voltage off and on.

NOTE
In case of active communication, the long reset period must be taken into account because otherwise
guarding errors will be signalled.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed

215
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3 Saving, reading and converting data in the


memory

10.3.1 Automatic data backup


The Ecomatmobil controllers allow to save data (BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD) non-volatilely (=
saved in case of voltage failure) in the memory. If the supply voltage drops, the backup operation is
automatically started. Therefore it is necessary that the data is filed as RETAIN variables.
The advantage of the automatic backup is that also in case of a sudden voltage drop or an interruption
of the supply voltage, the storage operation is triggered and thus the current values of the data are
saved (e.g. counter values).
If the supply voltage returns, the saved data is read from the memory via the operating system and
written back in the flag area.

10.3.2 Manual data storage


Besides the possibility to store the data automatically, user data can be stored manually, via function
calls, in integrated memories from where they can also be read.
Depending on the controller the following memories are available:
• EEPROM memory:
Only for SmartController, CabinetController CR0301 / CR0302, PCB controller.
Slow writing and reading.
Limited writing and reading frequency.
Any memory area can be selected.
Storing data with the function E2WRITE (→ page 220).
Reading data with the function E2READ (→ page 221).
• FRAM memory
Only for ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController, CabinetController CR0303,
PDM360 smart.
Fast writing and reading.
Unlimited writing and reading frequency.
Any memory area can be selected.
Storing data with the function FRAMWRITE.
Reading data with the function FRAMREAD.
• Flash memory
For all above mentioned controllers.
Fast writing and reading.
Limited writing and reading frequency.
Really useful only for storing large data quantities.
Before anew writing, the memory contents must be deleted.
Storing data with the function FLASHWRITE (→ page 217).
Reading data with the function FLASHREAD (→ page 219).

Info
By means of the storage partitioning (→ data sheet or operating instructions) the programmer can find
out which memory area is available.

216
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3.3 Function MEMCPY


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

MEMCPY
DST
SRC
LEN

Description
MEMCPY enables writing and reading different types of data directly in the memory.
The function writes the contents of the address of SRC to the address DST. In doing so, as many
bytes as indicated under LEN are transmitted. So it is also possible to transmit exactly one byte of a
word file.

NOTE
The address must be determined by means of the function ADR and assigned to MEMCPY.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
DST DWORD Address of the target variables
SRC DWORD Address of the source variables
LEN WORD Number of data bytes

217
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3.4 Function FLASHWRITE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

FLASHWRITE
ENABLE
DST
LEN
SRC

Description

WARNING
Danger due to uncontrollable process operations!
The status of the inputs/outputs is "frozen" during execution of FLASHWRITE.
► Do not execute this function when the machine is running!

FLASHWRITE enables writing of different data types directly into the flash memory.
The function writes the contents of the address SRC (must be determined by means of the function
ADR) into the flash memory. In doing so, as many bytes as indicated under LEN are transmitted.
An erasing operation must be carried out before the memory is written again. This is done by writing
any content to the address "0".

Info
Using this function, large data volumes are to be stored during set-up, to which there is only read
access in the process.

218
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
DST INT Relative start address in the memory.
Memory access only word-by-word;
permissible values: 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, ...
LEN INT Number of data bytes (max. 65 536 bytes)
SRC DWORD Address of the source variables

219
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3.5 Function FLASHREAD


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

FLASHREAD
ENABLE
SRC
LEN
DST

Description
FLASHREAD enables reading of different types of data directly from the flash memory.
The function reads the contents as from the address of SRC from the flash memory. In doing so, as
many bytes as indicated under LEN are transmitted.

NOTE
The address for DST must be determined using the function ADR and assigned to FLASHREAD.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
SRC INT Relative start address in the memory
LEN INT Number of data bytes (max. 65 536 bytes)
DST DWORD Address of the target variables

220
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3.6 Function E2WRITE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

E2WRITE
ENABLE RESULT
DST
LEN
SRC

Description
E2WRITE enables writing of different data types directly to the serial EEPROM.
The function writes the contents as from the address of SRC to the serial EEPROM. The execution of
the function takes some time, therefore it must be monitored via the function output RESULT. If
RESULT =1 , the input ENABLE must be set to FALSE again.

NOTE
The address for SRC must be determined using the function ADR and assigned to E2WRITE.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
DST INT Start address in the memory
(0...2FF16 and 34016 up to EEPROM size)
LEN INT Number of data bytes to be transmitted
SRC DINT Address of the source variables

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Function inactive
1 = Function stopped
2 = Function active

221
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Saving, reading and converting data in the memory

10.3.7 Function E2READ


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

E2READ
ENABLE RESULT
SRC
LEN
DST

Description
E2READ enables reading of different data from the serial EEPROM.
The function reads the contents as from the address of SRC from the serial EEPROM. Given that the
processing of the function takes some time it must be monitored via the function output RESULT. If
RESULT =1 , the input ENABLE must be set to FALSE again.

NOTE
The address for DST must be determined using the function ADR and assigned to E2READ.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
SRC INT Start address in the memory
(0...2FF16 and 40016 up to EEPROM size)
LEN INT Number of data bytes to be transmitted
DST DINT Address of the target variables

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BYTE 0 = Function inactive
1 = Function stopped
2 = Function active

222
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

10.4 Data access and data check


The functions described in this chapter control the data access and enable a data check.

10.4.1 Function SET_DEBUG


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

SET_DEBUG
ENABLE
DEBUG

Description
SET_DEBUG handles the DEBUG mode without active test input (→ chapter TEST mode,
→ page 38).
If the input DEBUG of the function is set to TRUE, the programming system or the downloader, for
example, can communicate with the controller and execute system commands (e.g. for service
functions via the GSM modem CANremote).

NOTE
In this operating mode a software download is not possible because the test input is not connected to
supply voltage.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
DEBUG BOOL TRUE: debugging via the interfaces possible
FALSE: debugging via the interfaces not possible

223
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

10.4.2 Function SET_IDENTITY


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SET_IDENTITY
ID

Description
SET_IDENTITY sets an application-specific program identification.
Using this function, a program identification can be created by the application program. This
identification (i.e. the software version) can be read via the software tool DOWNLOADER.EXE in order
to identify the loaded program.

224
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

The following figure shows the correlations of the different identifications as indicated by the different
software tools. (Example: ClassicController CR0020):

Boot loader Operating system Application/Machine

Identity Identity
BOOTLD_H 020923 CR0020
V2.0.0 041004 
Extended identity
CR0020 00.00.01 Hardware version
CR0020 00.00.01
SET_IDENTITY
Software version Nozzle in front
Nozzle in front

Downloader reads: Downloader reads:

BOOTLD_H 020923 CR0020


CR0020 00.00.01 V2.0.0 041004
ifm electronic gmbh
Nozzle in front

CANopen tool reads:

Hardware version
OBV 1009
CR0020 00.00.01

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ID STRING(80) Any string with a maximum length of 80 characters

225
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

10.4.3 Function GET_IDENTITY


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• ClassicController: CR0032
• ExtendedController: CR0232

Function symbol:

GET_IDENTITY
ENABLE DEVICENAME
FIRMWARE
RELEASE
APPLICATION

Description
GET_IDENTITY reads the application-specific program identification stored in the controller.
With this function the stored program identification can be read by the application program. The
following information is available:
• Hardware name and version
e.g.: "CR0032 00.00.01"
• Name of the runtime system
e.g.: "CR0032"
• Version and build of the runtime system
e.g.: "V00.00.01 071128"
• Name of the application
e.g.: "Crane1704"
The name of the application can be changed with the function SET_IDENTITY (→ page 223).

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed

226
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
DEVICENAME STRING(31) Hardware name and version
as string of max. 31 characters
e.g.: "CR0032 00.00.01"
FIRMWARE STRING(31) Name of the runtime system
as string of max. 31 characters
e.g.: "CR0032"
RELEASE STRING(31) Version and build of the runtime system
as string of max. 31 characters
e.g.: "V00.00.01 071128"
APPLICATION STRING(79) Name of the application
as string of max. 79 characters
e.g.: "Crane1704"

227
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

10.4.4 Function SET_PASSWORD


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SET_PASSWORD
ENABLE
PASSWORD

Description
SET_PASSWORD sets a user password for the program and memory upload with the
DOWNLOADER.
If the password is activated, reading of the application program or the data memory with the software
tool DOWNLOADER is only possible if the correct password has been entered.
If an empty string (default condition) is assigned to the input PASSWORD, an upload of the application
software or of the data memory is possible at any time.

ATTENTION
Please note for CR2500, CR0301, CR0302 and CS0015:
The EEPROM memory module may be destroyed by the permanent use of this function!
► Only carry out the function once during initialisation in the first program cycle!
Afterwards block the function again (ENABLE = "FALSE")!

NOTE
The password is reset when loading a new application program.

228
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
ID set
FALSE: function is not executed
PASSWORD STRING Password (maximum string length 16)

229
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

10.4.5 Function CHECK_DATA


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

CHECK_DATA
STARTADR RESULT
LENGTH CHECKSUM
UPDATE

Description
CHECK_DATA stores the data in the application data memory via a CRC code.
The function serves for monitoring a range of the data memory (possible WORD addresses as from
%MW0) for unintended changes to data in safety-critical applications. To do so, the function
determines a CRC checksum of the indicated data range.
If the input UPDATE = FALSE and data in the memory are changed inadvertently, RESULT = FALSE.
The result can then be used for further actions (e.g. deactivation of the outputs).
Data changes in the memory (e.g. by the application program or ecomatmobile device) are only
permitted if the output UPDATE is set to TRUE. The value of the checksum is then recalculated. The
output RESULT is permanently TRUE again.
The start address (type WORD e.g. %MW0) must be assigned to the function via the address operator
ADR. In addition, the number of data bytes LENGTH (length as from the STARTDR) must be
indicated.

NOTE
This function is a safety function. However, the controller does not automatically become a safety
controller by using this function. Only a tested and approved controller with a special operating system
can be used as safety controller.

230
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Data access and data check

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
STARTADR DINT Start address of the monitored data memory
(WORD address as from %MW0)
LENGTH WORD Length of the monitored data memory in [byte]
UPDATE BOOL TRUE: changes to data permissible
FALSE: changes to data not permitted

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RESULT BOOL TRUE: CRC checksum ok
FALSE: CRC checksum faulty
(data modified)

Example for CHECK_DATA


In the following example the program determines the checksum and stores it in the RAM via pointer pt:

NOTE: The method shown here is not suited for the flash memory.

231
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

10.5 Processing interrupts


The PLC cyclically processes the stored application program in its full length. The cycle time can vary
due to program branchings which depend e.g. on external events (= conditional jumps). This can have
negative effects on certain functions.
By means of systematic interrupts of the cyclic program it is possible to call time-critical processes
independently of the cycle in fixed time periods or in case of certain events.
Since interrupt functions are principally not permitted for SafetyControllers, they are thus not available.

232
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

10.5.1 Function SET_INTERRUPT_XMS


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

SET_INTERRUPT_XMS
ENABLE
REPEATTIME
READ_INPUTS
WRITE_OUTPUTS
ANALOG_INPUTS

Description
SET_INTERRUPT_XMS handles the execution of a program part at an interval of x ms.
In the conventional PLC the cycle time is decisive for real-time monitoring. So, the PLC is at a
disadvantage as compared to customer-specific controllers. Even a "real-time operating system" does
not change this fact when the whole application program runs in one single block which cannot be
changed.
A possible solution would be to keep the cycle time as short as possible. This often leads to splitting
the application up to several control cycles. This, however, makes programming complex and difficult.
Another possibility is to call a certain program part at fixed intervals (every x ms) independently of the
control cycle.
The time-critical part of the application is integrated by the user in a block of the type PROGRAM
(PRG). This block is declared as the interrupt routine by calling the function SET_INTERRUPT_XMS
once (during initialisation). As a consequence, this program block is always processed after the
REPEATTIME has elapsed (every x ms). If inputs and outputs are used in this program part, they are
also read and written in the defined cycle. Reading and writing can be stopped via the function inputs
READ_INPUTS, WRITE_OUTPUTS and ANALOG_INPUTS.
So, in the program block all time-critical events can be processed by linking inputs or global variables
and writing outputs. So, timers can be monitored more precisely than in a "normal cycle".

233
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

NOTE
To avoid that the program block called by interrupt is additionally called cyclically, it should be skipped
in the cycle (with the exception of the initialisation call).
Several timer interrupt blocks can be active. The time requirement of the interrupt functions must be
calculated so that all called functions can be executed. This in particular applies to calculations, floating
point arithmetic or controller functions.
Please note: In case of a high CAN bus activity the set REPEATTIME may fluctuate.

NOTE
The uniqueness of the inputs and outputs in the cycle is affected by the interrupt routine. Therefore only
part of the inputs and outputs is serviced. If initialised in the interrupt program, the following inputs and
outputs will be read or written.
Inputs, digital:
%IX0.0...%IX0.7 (CRnn32)
%IX0.12...%IX0.15, %IX1.4...%IX1.8 (all other ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController)
%IX0.0, %IX0.8 (SmartController)
IN08...IN11 (CabinetController)
IN0...IN3 (PCB controller)
Inputs, analogue:
%IX0.0...%IX0.7 (CRnn32)
All channels (selection bit-coded) (all other controller)
Outputs, digital:
%QX0.0...%QX0.7 (ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController)
%QX0.0, %QX0.8 (SmartController)
OUT00...OUT03 (CabinetController)
OUT0...OUT7 (PCB controller)
Global variants, too, are no longer unique if they are accessed simultaneously in the cycle and by the
interrupt routine. This problem applies in particular to larger data types (e.g. DINT).
All other inputs and outputs are processed once in the cycle, as usual.

234
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
changes to data allowed
FALSE: changes to data not allowed
(during processing of the program)
REPEATTIME TIME Time window during which the interrupt is triggered.
READ_INPUTS BOOL TRUE: inputs integrated into the routine are read (if
necessary, set inputs to IN_FAST).
FALSE: inputs integrated into the routine are not read.

WRITE_OUTPUTS BOOL TRUE: outputs integrated into the routine are written to.
FALSE: outputs integrated into the routine are not written to.
ANALOG_INPUTS BOOL TRUE: Analogue inputs integrated into the routine are read
and the raw value of the voltage is transferred to the system
flags ANALOG_IRQxx.
FALSE: Analogue inputs integrated into the routine are not
read.

235
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

10.5.2 Function SET_INTERRUPT_I


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1071

Function symbol:

SET_INTERRUPT_I
ENABLE
CHANNEL
MODE
READ_INPUTS
WRITE_OUTPUTS
ANALOG_INPUTS
(only for devices with analogue channels)

SET_INTERRUPT_I
ENABLE
CHANNEL
MODE
READ_INPUTS
WRITE_OUTPUTS
(for devices without analogue channels)

Description
SET_INTERRUPT_I handles the execution of a program part by an interrupt request via an input
channel.
In the conventional PLC the cycle time is decisive for real-time monitoring. So the PLC is at a
disadvantage as compared to customer-specific controllers. Even a "real-time operating system" does
not change this fact when the whole application program runs in one single block which cannot be
changed.
A possible solution would be to keep the cycle time as short as possible. This often leads to splitting
the application up to several control cycles. This, however, makes programming complex and difficult.
Another possibility is to call a certain program part only upon request by an input pulse independently
of the control cycle.
The time-critical part of the application is integrated by the user in a block of the type PROGRAM
(PRG). This block is declared as the interrupt routine by calling the function SET_INTERRUPT_I once
(during initialisation). As a consequence, this program block will always be executed if an edge is
detected on the input CHANNEL. If inputs and outputs are used in this program part, these are also

236
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

read and written in the interrupt routine, triggered by the input edge. Reading and writing can be
stopped via the function inputs READ_INPUTS, WRITE_OUTPUTS and ANALOG_INPUTS.
So in the program block all time-critical events can be processed by linking inputs or global variables
and writing outputs. So functions can only be executed if actually called by an input signal.

NOTE
The program block should be skipped in the cycle (except for the initialisation call) so that it is not
cyclically called, too.
The input (CHANNEL) monitored for triggering the interrupt cannot be initialised and further processed
in the interrupt routine.
The inputs must be in the operating mode IN_FAST, otherwise the interrupts cannot be read.

NOTE
The uniqueness of the inputs and outputs in the cycle is affected by the interrupt routine. Therefore only
part of the inputs and outputs is serviced. If initialised in the interrupt program, the following inputs and
outputs will be read or written.
Inputs, digital:
%IX0.0...%IX0.7 (CRnn32)
%IX0.12...%IX0.15, %IX1.4...%IX1.8 (all other ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController)
%IX0.0, %IX0.8 (SmartController)
IN08...IN11 (CabinetController)
IN0...IN3 (PCB controller)
Inputs, analogue:
%IX0.0...%IX0.7 (CRnn32)
All channels (selection bit-coded) (all other controller)
Outputs, digital:
%QX0.0...%QX0.7 (ClassicController, ExtendedController, SafetyController)
%QX0.0, %QX0.8 (SmartController)
OUT00...OUT03 (CabinetController)
OUT0...OUT7 (PCB controller)
Global variants, too, are no longer unique if they are accessed simultaneously in the cycle and by the
interrupt routine. This problem applies in particular to larger data types (e.g. DINT).
All other inputs and outputs are processed once in the cycle, as usual.

237
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing interrupts

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only for 1 cycle):
changes to data permissible
FALSE: changes to data not permitted
(during processing of the program)
CHANNEL BYTE interrupt input
Classic/ExtendedController:
0 = %IX1.4
1 = %IX1.5
2 = %IX1.6
3 = %IX1.7
SmartController:
0 = %IX0.0
1 = %IX0.8
CabinetController:
0 = IN08 (etc.)
3 = IN11
CS0015:
0 = IN0 (etc.)
3 = IN3
MODE BYTE Type of edge at the input CHANNEL which triggers the
interrupt
1 = rising edge
2 = falling edge
3 = rising and falling edge
READ_INPUTS BOOL TRUE: inputs integrated into the routine are read (if
necessary, set inputs to IN_FAST)
FALSE: inputs integrated into the routine are not read
WRITE_OUTPUTS BOOL TRUE: outputs integrated into the routine are written
FALSE: outputs integrated into the routine are not written
ANALOG_INPUTS BYTE (only for devices with analogue channels)
Selection of the inputs bit-coded:
010 = no input selected
110 = 1st analogue input selected (0000 00012)
210 = 2nd analogue input selected (0000 00102)
...
12810 = 8th analogue input selected (1000 00002)
A combination of the inputs is possible via an OR operation of
the values.
Example: Select 1st and 3rd analogue input:
(0000 00012) OR (0000 01002) = (0000 01012) = 510

238
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

10.6 Use of the serial interface


NOTE
In principle, the serial interface is not available for the user because it is used for program download
and debugging.
The interface can be freely used if the user sets the system flag bit SERIAL_MODE to TRUE. Then
however, program download and debugging are only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or via
USB.

The serial interface can be used in the application program by means of the following functions.

239
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

10.6.1 Function SERIAL_SETUP


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SERIAL_SETUP
ENABLE
BAUDRATE
DATABITS
PARITY
STOPBITS

Description
SERIAL_SETUP initialises the serial RS232 interface.
SERIAL_SETUP sets the serial interface to the indicated parameters. Using the function input
ENABLE, the function is activated for one cycle.
The SERIAL functions form the basis for the creation of an application-specific protocol for the serial
interface.

NOTE
In principle, the serial interface is not available for the user, because it is used for program download
and debugging.
The interface can be freely used if the user sets the system flag bit SERIAL_MODE to TRUE. Then
however, program download and debugging are only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or via
USB.

ATTENTION
The driver module of the serial interface can be damaged!
Disconnecting the serial interface while live can cause undefined states which damage the driver
module.
► Do not disconnect the serial interface while live.

240
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE (only 1 cycle):
interface is initialised
FALSE: running operation
BAUDRATE BYTE Baud rate
(permissible values = 9 600, 19 200, 28 800, (57 600))
preset value → data sheet
DATABITS BYTE Data bits
(permissible values: 7 or 8)
preset value = 8
PARITY BYTE Parity
(permissible values: 0=none, 1=even, 2=uneven)
preset value = 0
STOPBITS BYTE Stop bits
(permissible values: 1 or 2)
preset value = 1

241
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

10.6.2 Function SERIAL_TX


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SERIAL_TX
ENABLE
DATA

Description
SERIAL_TX transmits one data byte via the serial RS232 interface.
Using the function input ENABLE the transmission can be enabled or blocked.
The SERIAL functions form the basis for the creation of an application-specific protocol for the serial
interface.

NOTE
In principle, the serial interface is not available for the user, because it is used for program download
and debugging.
The interface can be freely used if the user sets the system flag bit SERIAL_MODE to TRUE. Then
however, program download and debugging are only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or via
USB.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: transmission enabled
FALSE: transmission blocked
DATA BYTE Byte to be transmitted

242
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

10.6.3 Function SERIAL_RX


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SERIAL_RX
CLEAR RX
AVAILABLE
OVERFLOW

Description
SERIAL_RX reads a received data byte from the serial receive buffer at each call.
Then, the value of AVAILABLE is decremented by 1.
If more than 1000 data bytes are received, the buffer overflows and data is lost. This is indicated by
the bit OVERFLOW.
The SERIAL functions form the basis for the creation of an application-specific protocol for the serial
interface.

NOTE
In principle, the serial interface is not available for the user, because it is used for program download
and debugging.
The interface can be freely used if the user sets the system flag bit SERIAL_MODE to TRUE. Then
however, program download and debugging are only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or via
USB.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
CLEAR BOOL TRUE: receive buffer is deleted
FALSE: default condition

243
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
RX BYTE Byte data received from the receive buffer
AVAILABLE WORD Number of data bytes received
0 = no valid data available
OVERFLOW BOOL Overflow of the data buffer, loss of data!

Example:
3 bytes are received:
1st call of SERIAL_RX
1 valid value at output RX
→ AVAILABLE = 3
2nd call of SERIAL_RX
1 valid value at output RX
→ AVAILABLE = 2
3rd call of SERIAL_RX
1 valid value at output RX
→ AVAILABLE = 1
4th call of SERIAL_RX
invalid value at the output RX
→ AVAILABLE = 0
If AVAILABLE = 0, the function can be skipped during processing of the program.

244
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Use of the serial interface

10.6.4 Function SERIAL_PENDING


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

SERIAL_PENDING
NUMBER

Description
SERIAL_PENDING determines the number of data bytes stored in the serial receive buffer.
In contrast to the function SERIAL_RX (→ page 242) the contents of the buffer remain unchanged
after calling this function.
The SERIAL functions form the basis for the creation of an application-specific protocol for the serial
interface.

NOTE
In principle, the serial interface is not available for the user, because it is used for program download
and debugging.
The interface can be freely used if the user sets the system flag bit SERIAL_MODE to TRUE. Then
however, program download and debugging are only possible via the CAN interface.
For CRnn32: Debugging of the application software is then only possible via all 4 CAN interfaces or via
USB.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
NUMBER WORD Number of data bytes received

245
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Reading the system time

10.7 Reading the system time


The following functions offered by ifm electronic allow you to read the continually running system
time of the controller and to evaluate it in the application program.

10.7.1 Function TIMER_READ


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

TIMER_READ
T

Description
TIMER_READ reads the current system time.
When the supply voltage is applied, the controller generates a clock pulse which is counted upwards in
a register. This register can be read using the function call and can for example be used for time
measurement.

NOTE
The system timer goes up to FFFF FFFF16 at the maximum (corresponds to about 49.7 days) and then
starts again from 0.

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
T TIME Current system time (resolution [ms])

246
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Reading the system time

10.7.2 Function TIMER_READ_US


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500
• PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

Function symbol:

TIMER_READ_US
TIME_US

Description
TIMER_READ_US reads the current system time in [µs].
When the supply voltage is applied, the controller generates a clock pulse which is counted upwards in
a register. This register can be read by means of the function call and can for example be used for
time measurement.

Info
The system timer runs up to the counter value 4 294 967 295 µs at the maximum and then starts again
from 0.
4 294 967 295 µs = 71 582.8 min = 1 193 h = 49.7 d

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
TIME_US DWORD Current system time (resolution [μs])

247
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing analogue input values

10.8 Processing analogue input values


In this chapter we show you functions which allow you to read and process the values of analogue
voltages or currents at the controller input.

248
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing analogue input values

10.8.1 Function INPUT_ANALOG


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200, CR7505
(For safety signals use function SAFE_ANALOG_OK in addition!)
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

INPUT_ANALOG
ENABLE OUT
MODE
CHANNEL

Description
INPUT_ANALOG enables current and voltage measurements at the analogue channels.
The function provides the current analogue value at the selected analogue channel. The measurement
and the output value result from the operating mode specified via MODE (digital input, 0...20 mA,
0...10 V, 0...30 V). For parameter setting of the operating mode, the indicated global system variables
should be used. The analogue values are provided as standardised values.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
MODE BYTE IN_DIGITAL_H digital input
IN_CURRENT current input 0...20 000 μA
IN_VOLTAGE10 voltage input 0...10 000 mV
IN_VOLTAGE30 voltage input 0...30 000 mV
IN_VOLTAGE32 voltage input 0...32 000 mV
IN_RATIO ratiometric analogue input
INPUT_CHANNEL BYTE Input channel

249
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing analogue input values

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
OUT WORD Output value

250
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing analogue input values

10.8.2 Function INPUT_VOLTAGE


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200, CR7505
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

INPUT_VOLTAGE
ENABLE ACTUAL_VOLTAGE
MODE_10V_32V
INPUT_CHANNEL

Description
INPUT_VOLTAGE processes analogue voltages measured on the analogue channels.
The function returns the current input voltage in [mV] on the selected analogue channel. The
measurement refers to the voltage range defined via MODE_10V_32V (10 000 mV or 32 000 mV).

Info
INPUT_VOLTAGE is a compatibility function for older programs. In new programs, the more powerful
function INPUT_ANALOG (→ page 248) should be used.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
MODE_10V_32V BOOL TRUE: voltage range 0...32 V
FALSE: voltage range 0...10 V
INPUT_CHANNEL BYTE Input channel

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ACTUAL_VOLTAGE WORD output voltage in [mV]

251
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Processing analogue input values

10.8.3 Function INPUT_CURRENT


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200, CR7505
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

INPUT_CURRENT
ENABLE ACTUAL_CURRENT
INPUT_CHANNEL

Description
INPUT_CURRENT processes analogue currents measured at the analogue channels.
The function returns the actual input current in [µA] at the analogue current inputs.

Info
INPUT_CURRENT is a compatibility function for older programs. In new programs, the more powerful
function INPUT_ANALOG (→ page 248) should be used.

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
ENABLE BOOL TRUE: function is executed
FALSE: function is not executed
INPUT_CHANNEL BYTE Analogue current inputs 4...7

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
ACTUAL_CURRENT WORD Input current in [µA]

252
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Adapting analogue values

10.9 Adapting analogue values


If the values of analogue inputs or the results of analogue functions must be adapted, the following
functions will help you.

253
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Adapting analogue values

10.9.1 Function NORM


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

NORM
X Y
XH
XL
YH
YL

Description
NORM normalises a value within defined limits to a value with new limits.
The function normalises a value of type WORD within the limits of XH and XL to an output value within
the limits of YH and YL. This function is for example used for generating PWM values from analogue
input values.

NOTE
The value for X must be in the defined input range between XL and XH (there is no internal plausibility
check of the value).
Due to rounding errors the normalised value can deviate by 1.
If the limits (XH/XL or YH/YL) are defined in an inverted manner, normalisation is also done in an
inverted manner.

254
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

More functions in the ecomatmobile controller Adapting analogue values

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X WORD current input value
XH WORD upper limit of input value range
XL WORD lower limit of input value range
YH WORD upper limit of output value range
YL WORD lower limit of output value range

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y WORD normalised value

Example 1
lower limit value input 0 XL
upper limit value input 100 XH
lower limit value output 0 YL
upper limit value output 2000 YH
then the function converts the input signal for example as follows:
from X = 50 0 100 75
to Y = 1000 0 2000 1500

Example 2
lower limit value input 2000 XL
upper limit value input 0 XH
lower limit value output 0 YL
upper limit value output 100 YH
then the function converts the input signal for example as follows:
from X = 1000 0 2000 1500
to Y = 50 100 0 25

255
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller General

11 Controller functions in the ecomatmobile


controller
General ................................................................................................................................... 256
Setting rule for a controller ..................................................................................................... 258
Functions for controllers ......................................................................................................... 259

11.1 General
Controlling is a process during which the unit to be controlled (control variable x) is continuously
detected and compared with the reference variable w. Depending on the result of this comparison, the
control variable is influenced for adaptation to the reference variable.
Störgröße d
Disturbance variable d
Führungsgröße w
Reference variable w Regelgröße x
Controlled variable x
Regeleinrichtung Regelstrecke
Controller Controlled system
Stellgröße y
Manipulated variable y

Regelkreis / Control circuit

Figure: Principle of controlling

The selection of a suitable control device and its optimum setting require exact indication of the
steady-state behaviour and the dynamic behaviour of the controlled system. In most cases these
characteristic values can only be determined by experiments and can hardly be influenced.
Three types of controlled systems can be distinguished:

11.1.1 Self-regulating process


For a self-regulating process the control variable x goes towards a new final value after a certain
manipulated variable (steady state). The decisive factor for these controlled systems is the
amplification (steady-state transfer factor KS). The smaller the amplification, the better the system can
be controlled. These controlled systems are referred to as P systems (P = proportional).

Figure: P controller = self-regulating process

256
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller General

11.1.2 Controlled system without inherent regulation


Controlled systems with an amplifying factor towards infinity are referred to as controlled systems
without inherent regulation. This is usually due to an integrating performance. The consequence is that
the control variable increases constantly after the manipulated variable has been changed or by the
influence of an interfering factor. Due to this behaviour it never reaches a final value. These controlled
systems are referred to as I systems (I = integral).

Figure: I controller = controlled system without inherent regulation

11.1.3 Controlled system with delay


Most controlled systems correspond to series systems of P systems (systems with compensation) and
one or several T1 systems (systems with inertia). A controlled system of the 1st order is for example
made up of the series connection of a throttle point and a subsequent memory.

Figure: PT system = controlled system with delay

For controlled systems with dead time the control variable does not react to a change of the control
variable before the dead time Tt has elapsed. The dead time Tt or the sum of Tt + Tu relates to the
controllability of the system. The controllability of a system is the better, the greater the ratio Tg/Tu.
The controllers which are integrated in the library are a summary of the preceding basic functions. It
depends on the respective controlled system which functions are used and how they are combined.

257
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Setting rule for a controller

11.2 Setting rule for a controller


For controlled systems, whose time constants are unknown the setting procedure to Ziegler and
Nickols in a closed control loop is of advantage.

11.2.1 Setting control


At the beginning the controlling system is operated as a purely P-controlling system. In this respect
the derivative time TV is set to 0 and the reset time TN to a very high value (ideally to ∞) for a slow
system. For a fast controlled system a small TN should be selected.
Afterwards the gain KP is increased until the control deviation and the adjustment deviation perform
steady oscillation at a constant amplitude at KP = KPcritical. Then the stability limit has been reached.
Then the time period Tcritical of the steady oscillation has to be determined.
Add a differential component only if necessary.
TV should be approx. 2...10 times smaller than TN
KP should be equal to KD.
Idealised setting of the controlled system:
Control unit KP = KD TN TV
P 2.0 * KPcritical –– ––
PI 2.2 * KPcritical 0.83 * Tcritical ––
PID 1.7 * KPcritical 0.50 * Tcritical 0.125 * Tcritical

NOTE
For this setting process it has to be noted that the controlled system is not harmed by the oscillation
generated. For sensitive controlled systems KP must only be increased to a value at which no
oscillation occurs.

11.2.2 Damping of overshoot


To dampen overshoot the function PT1 (→ page 261) (low pass) can be used. In this respect the
preset value XS is damped by the PT1 link before it is supplied to the controller function.
The setting variable T1 should be approx. 4...5 times greater than TN (of the PID or GLR controller).

258
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3 Functions for controllers


The section below describes in detail the functions that are provided for set-up by software controllers
in the ecomatmobile controller. The functions can also be used as basis for the development of your
own control functions.

259
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3.1 Function DELAY


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

DELAY
X Y
T

Description
DELAY delays the output of the input value by the time T (dead-time element).
The function is used to delay an input value by the time T.
y

1
Tt

t=0 t
Figure: Time characteristics of DELAY

NOTE
To ensure that the function works correctly, it must be called in each cycle.

260
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X WORD Input value
T TIME Time delay (dead time)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y WORD Input value, delayed by the time T

261
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3.2 Function PT1


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PT1
X Y
T1

Description
PT1 handles a controlled system with a first-order time delay.
This function is a proportional controlled system with a time delay. It is for example used for generating
ramps when using the PWM functions.
The output variable Y of the low-pass filter has the following time characteristics (unit step):
y
Tt

t=0 t
Figure: Time characteristics of PT1

262
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X INT Input value
T1 TIME Delay time (time constant)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y INT Output variable

263
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3.3 Function PID1


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PID1
X Y
XS
XMAX
KP
KI
KD

Description
PID1 handles a PID controller.
The change of the manipulated variable of a PID controller has a proportional, integral and differential
component. The manipulated variable changes first by an amount which depends on the rate of
change of the input value (D component). After the end of the derivative action time the manipulated
variable returns to the value corresponding to the proportional range and changes in accordance with
the reset time.

NOTE
The manipulated variable Y is already standardised to the PWM function (RELOAD value = 65,535).
Note the reverse logic:
65,535 = minimum value
0 = maximum value.
Note that the input values KI and KD depend on the cycle time. To obtain stable, repeatable control
characteristics, the function should be called in a time-controlled manner.

If X > XS, the manipulated variable is increased.


If X < XS, the manipulated variable is reduced.

264
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

The manipulated variable Y has the following time characteristics:


y
KD

KI * Xd

KP * Xd

~TV TN t

Figure: Typical step response of a PID controller

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X WORD Actual value
XS WORD Desired value
XMAX WORD Maximum value of the target value
KP BYTE Constant of the proportional component
KI BYTE Integral value
KD BYTE Proportional component of the differential component

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y WORD Manipulated variable

Recommended setting
KP = 50
KI = 30
KD = 5
With the values indicated above the controller operates very quickly and in a stable way. The controller
does not fluctuate with this setting.
► To optimise the controller, the values can be gradually changed afterwards.

265
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3.4 Function PID2


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0032, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200, CR0232
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7032, CR7200, CR7201, CR7232, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

PID2
X Y
XS
XMAX
KP
KI
TN
KD
TV
RESET

Description
PID2 handles a PID controller with self optimisation.
The change of the manipulated variable of a PID controller has a proportional, integral and differential
component. The manipulated variable changes first by an amount which depends on the rate of
change of the input value (D component). After the end of the derivative action time TV the
manipulated variable returns to the value corresponding to the proportional component and changes in
accordance with the reset time TN.
The values entered at the function inputs KP and KD are internally divided by 10. So, a finer grading
can be obtained (e.g.: KP = 17, which corresponds to 1.7).

NOTE
The manipulated variable Y is already standardised to the PWM function (RELOAD value = 65,535).
Note the reverse logic:
65,535 = minimum value
0 = maximum value.
Note that the input value KD depends on the cycle time. To obtain stable, repeatable control
characteristics, the function should be called in a time-controlled manner.

266
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

If X > XS, the manipulated variable is increased.


If X < XS, the manipulated variable is reduced.
A reference variable is internally added to the manipulated variable.
Y = Y + 65,536 – (XS / XMAX * 65,536).
The manipulated variable Y has the following time characteristics.
y
KD

KI * Xd

KP * Xd

~TV TN t

Figure: Typical step response of a PID controller

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X WORD Actual value
XS WORD Desired value
XMAX WORD Maximum value of the desired value
KP BYTE Constant of the Proportional component (/10)
TN TIME Reset time (Integral component)
KD BYTE Proportional component of the Differential component (/10)
TV TIME Derivative action time (Differential component)
SO BOOL Self-optimisation
RESET BOOL Reset the function

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y WORD Manipulated variable

267
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

Recommended setting
► Select TN according to the time characteristics of the system:
fast system = small TN
slow system = large TN
► Slowly increment KP gradually, up to a value at which still definitely no fluctuation will occur.
► Readjust TN if necessary.
► Add differential component only if necessary:
Select a TV value approx. 2...10 times smaller than TN.
Select a KD value more or less similar to KP.
Note that the maximum control deviation is + 127. For good control characteristics this range should
not be exceeded, but it should be exploited to the best possible extent.

268
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

11.3.5 Function GLR


Contained in the library:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB
Available for the following devices:
• CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302, CR0303
• ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
• ExtendedController: CR0200
• PCB controller: CS0015
• SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021, CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
• SmartController: CR2500

Function symbol:

GLR
X1 Y1
X2 Y2
XS
XMAX
KP
TN
KD
TV

Description
GLR handles a synchro controller.
The synchro controller is a controller with PID characteristics.
The values entered at the function inputs KP and KD are internally divided by 10. So, a finer grading
can be obtained (e.g.: KP = 17, which corresponds to 1.7).
The manipulated variable referred to the greater actual value is increased accordingly.
The manipulated variable referred to the smaller actual value corresponds to the reference variable.
Reference variable = 65 536 – (XS / XMAX * 65 536).

NOTE
The manipulated variables Y1 and Y2 are already standardised to the PWM function (RELOAD value
= 65 535). Note the reverse logic:
65 535 = minimum value
0 = maximum value.
Note that the input value KD depends on the cycle time. To obtain stable, repeatable control
characteristics, the function should be called in a time-controlled manner.

269
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller Functions for controllers

Parameters of the function inputs


Name Data type Description
X1 WORD actual value channel 1
X2 WORD actual value channel 2
XS WORD desired value = reference variable
XMAX WORD maximum value of the desired value
KP BYTE constant of the proportional component (/10)
TN TIME reset time (integral component)
KD BYTE proportional component of the differential component (/10)
TV TIME derivative action time (differential component)

Parameters of the function outputs


Name Data type Description
Y1 WORD manipulated variable channel 1
Y2 WORD manipulated variable channel 2

270
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Functions for controllers

12 Annex
Address assignment and I/O operating modes ...................................................................... 272
System flags ........................................................................................................................... 274
Overview of the files and libraries used.................................................................................. 275

Additionally to the indications in the data sheets you find summary tables in the annex.

271
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Address assignment and I/O operating modes

12.1 Address assignment and I/O operating modes


→ also data sheet

12.1.1 Addresses / variables of the I/Os


Port IEC address I/O variable Remark
%QB4 I0_MODE configuration byte for %IX0.0
flag bit*) ERROR_I0 DIAGNOSIS bit for %IX0.0
%Q5 I1_MODE configuration byte for %IX0.8
flag bit*) ERROR_I1 DIAGNOSIS bit for %IX0.8
%QB4 I2_MODE configuration byte for %IX1.0
flag bit*) ERROR_I2 DIAGNOSIS bit for %IX1.0
%QB4 I3_MODE configuration byte for %IX1.8
flag bit*) ERROR_I3 DIAGNOSIS bit for %IX1.8

%QB0 Q1Q2 output byte 0 (%QX0.00...%QX0.07)


flag byte*) ERROR_SHORT_Q1Q2 error byte ports 1+2 short circuit (%QX0.00...%QX0.07)
flag byte*) ERROR_BREAK_Q1Q2 error byte ports 1+2 interruption (%QX0.00...%QX0.07)
*) IEC addresses can vary according to the control configuration.

12.1.2 Address assignment inputs / outputs


IEC address Name IO Configuration with Default Possible configuration
variable variable value
%IX0.0 / %IW2 I0 / I0_MODE 0 L digital / CYL0 / FRQ0
ANALOG0
%IX0.8 / %IW3 I1 / I1_MODE 0 L digital / CYL1 / FRQ1
ANALOG1
%IX1.0 / %IW4 I2 / I2_MODE 0 only L digital
ANALOG2
%IX1.8 / %IW5 I3 / I3_MODE 0 only L digital
ANALOG3
%IW6 ANALOG4 I4_MODE 3 analogue U/I
%IW7 ANALOG5 I5_MODE 3 analogue U/I
%IW8 ANALOG6 I6_MODE 3 analogue U/I
%IW9 ANALOG7 I7_MODE 3 analogue U/I

%QX0.0 Q0 - - H digital / PWM / PWMI


%QX0.8 Q1 - - H digital / PWM / PWMI
%QX1.0 Q2 - - H digital / PWM / PWMI

272
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Address assignment and I/O operating modes

IEC address Name IO Configuration with Default Possible configuration


variable variable value
%QX1.8 Q3 - - H digital / PWM / PWMI
PWM description → chapter PWM signal processing (→ page 161)
PWMI description → chapter Current control with PWM (→ page 172)
FRQ/CYL description → chapter Counter functions for frequency and period measurement
(→ page 200)

12.1.3 Possible operating modes inputs / outputs


Inputs Operating mode Config. Outputs Operating mode Config. value
value
I0…I3 IN_DIGITAL 0 (default)
IN_DIAGNOSIC 4
I0…I1 IN_DIGITAL_FAST 5

I4…I7 IN_CURRENT 1
IN_VOLTAGE10 2
IN_VOLTAGE30 3 (default)

273
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex System flags

12.2 System flags


(→ chapter Error codes and diagnostic information, → page 39)
System flag Type Function
CANx_BAUDRATE WORD CAN interface x: Currently set baud rate
CANx_BUSOFF BOOL CAN interface x: Interface is not on the bus
CANx_LASTERROR ¹) BYTE CAN interface x: Error number of the last CAN
transmission:
0= no error
≠0 → CAN specification → LEC
CANx_WARNING BOOL CAN interface x: Warning threshold reached (> 96)
DOWNLOADID WORD Currently set download identifier
ERROR BOOL Set ERROR bit
ERROR_BREAK_Qx BYTE Wire break error on output group x
ERROR_IO BOOL I/O error (group bit)
ERROR_Ix BYTE Peripheral error on input group x
ERROR_MEMORY BOOL Memory error
ERROR_POWER BOOL Undervoltage/overvoltage error
ERROR_SHORT_Qx BYTE Short circuit error on output group x
ERROR_VBBR BOOL Supply voltage error VBBR
LED_MODE WORD Flashing frequency from the data structure
"LED_MODES"
SERIAL_MODE BOOL Switch-on of serial communication
SERIALBAUDRATE WORD Baud rate of the RS-232 interface
SUPPLY_VOLTAGE WORD Supply voltage
TEST BOOL Enabling the programming mode
CANx stands for the number of the CAN interface (CAN 1...x, depending on the device).
Ix/Qx stands for the input/output group (word 0...x, depending on the device).
¹) Access to this flags requires detailed knowledge of the CAN controller and is normally not required.

NOTE
Only symbol names should be used for the programming since the corresponding flag addresses can
change in case of an extension of the PLC configuration.

274
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

12.3 Overview of the files and libraries used


(as on 2 Feb. 2009)
Depending on the unit and the desired function, different libraries and files are used. Some are
automatically loaded, others must be inserted or loaded by the programmer.
Installation of the files and libraries in the device:
Factory setting: the device contains only the boot loader.
► Load the operating system (*.H86)
► Create the project (*.PRO) in the PC: enter the target (*.TRG)
► (Additionally for targets before V05:) define the PLC configuration (*.CFG)
> CoDeSys® integrates the files belonging to the target into the project:
*.TRG, *.CFG, *.CHM, *.INI, *.LIB
► If required, add further libraries to the project (*.LIB).
Certain libraries automatically integrate further libraries into the project.
Some functions in ifm libraries (ifm_*.LIB) e.g. are based on functions in CoDeSys® libraries
(3S_*.LIB).

12.3.1 General overview


File name Description and memory location *)
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.CFG ¹) PLC configuration
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxx.CFG ²) per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: IEC and symbolic addresses of the inputs and outputs, the flag
bytes as well as the memory allocation
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\ifm_CRnnnncfg\Vxxyyzz
CAA-*.CHM Online help
per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: online help for this device
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\Help\… (language)
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.H86 Operating system / runtime system
(must be loaded into the controller / monitor when used for the first time)
per device only 1 device-specific file
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\Library\ifm_CRnnnn
ifm_Browser_CRnnnn.INI CoDeSys browser commands
(CoDeSys® needs the file for starting the project)
per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: commands for the browser in CoDeSys®
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm
ifm_Errors_CRnnnn.INI CoDeSys error file
(CoDeSys® needs the file for starting the project)
per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: device-specific error messages from CoDeSys®
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxx.TRG Target file
per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: hardware description for CoDeSys®, e.g.: memory, file locations
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm

275
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

File name Description and memory location *)


ifm_*_Vxxyyzz.LIB General libraries
per device several files are possible
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\Library
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB Device-specific library
per device only 1 device-specific file
inlcudes: functions of this device
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\Library\ifm_CRnnnn
ifm_CRnnnn_*_Vxxyyzz.LIB Device-specific libraries
per device several files are possible
→ following tables
…\CoDeSys V*\Targets\ifm\Library\ifm_CRnnnn
Legend:
* any signs
CRnnnn article number of the controller / monitor
V* CoDeSys® version
Vxx version number of the ifm software
yy release number of the ifm software
zz patch number of the ifm software
¹) valid for CRnn32 target version up to V01, all other devices up to V04
²) valid for CRnn32 target version from V02 onwards, all other devices from V05 onwards:
*) memory location of the files:
System drive (C: / D:) \ program folder\ ifm electronic

NOTE:
The software versions suitable for the selected target must always be used:
• of the operating system (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.H86),
• of the PLC configuration (CRnnnn_Vxx.CFG),
• of the device library (CRnnnn_Vxxyyyzz.LIB),
• and the further files (→ chapter Overview of the files and libraries used, → page 275)
CRnnnn device article number
Vxx: 00...99 target version number
yy: 00...99 release number
zz: 00...99 patch number
The basic file name (e.g. "CR0032") and the software version number "xx" (e.g. "02") must always have
the same value! Otherwise the controller goes to the STOP mode.
The values for "yy" (release number) and "zz" (patch number) do not have to match.

Also note: the following files must also be loaded:


• The for the project required internal libraries (designed in IEC1131),
• the configuration files (*.CFG)
• and the target files (*.TRG).

276
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

12.3.2 What are the individual files and libraries used for?
The following overview shows which files/libraries can and may be used with which unit. It may be
possible that files/libraries which are not indicated in this list can only be used under certain conditions
or the functionality has not yet been tested.

Files for the operating system / runtime system


File name Function Available for:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.H86 operating system / runtime system all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_Browser_CRnnnn.INI CoDeSys browser commands all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_Errors_CRnnnn.INI CoDeSys error file all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors

Target file
File name Function Available for:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxx.TRG Target file all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors

PLC configuration file


File name Function Available for:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.CFG PLC configuration all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors

ifm device libraries


File name Function Available for:
ifm_CRnnnn_Vxxyyzz.LIB device-specific library all ecomatmobile controllers
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_CR0200_MSTR_Vxxyyzz.LIB library without extended functions ExtendedController: CR0200
ifm_CR0200_SMALL_Vxxyyzz.LIB library without extended functions, ExtendedController: CR0200
reduced functions

277
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

ifm CANopen libraries master / slave


These libraries are based on the CoDeSys® libraries (3S CANopen functions) and make them
available to the user in a simple way.
File name Function Available for:
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenMaster_Vxxyyz CANopen master emergency and status all ecomatmobile controllers
z.LIB handler
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_CRnnnn_CANopenSlave_Vxxyyzz CANopen slave emergency and status all ecomatmobile controllers
.LIB handler
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_CANx_SDO_Vxxyyzz.LIB CANopen SDO read and SDO write PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056

CoDeSys® CANopen libraries


File name Function Available for:
3S_CanDrvOptTable.LIB ¹) CANopen driver all ecomatmobile controllers
3S_CanDrvOptTableEx.LIB ²)
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
3S_CanDrv.LIB PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
3S_CANopenDeviceOptTable.LIB ¹) CANopen slave driver all ecomatmobile controllers
3S_CANopenDeviceOptTableEx.LIB ²)
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
3S_CANopenDevice.LIB PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
3S_CANopenManagerOptTable.LIB ¹) CANopen network manager all ecomatmobile controllers
3S_CANopenManagerOptTableEx.LIB ²)
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
3S_CANopenManager.LIB PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
3S_CANopenMasterOptTable.LIB ¹) CANopen master all ecomatmobile controllers
3S_CANopenMasterOptTableEx.LIB ²)
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
3S_CANopenMaster.LIB PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
3S_CANopenNetVarOptTable.LIB ¹) Driver for network variables all ecomatmobile controllers
3S_CANopenNetVarOptTableEx.LIB ²)
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
3S_CANopenNetVar.LIB PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056

278
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

¹) valid for CRnn32 target version up to V01, all other devices up to V04
²) valid for CRnn32 target version from V02 onwards, all other devices from V05 onwards:

Specific ifm libraries


File name Function Available for:
ifm_J1939_Vxxyyzz.LIB J1939 communication functions up to target V04:
CabinetController: CR0303
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0200
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200,
CR7505
SmartController: CR2500
ifm_J1939_x_Vxxyyzz.LIB J1939 communication functions from target V05:
CabinetController: CR0303
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0200
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021,
CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
ifm_CRnnnn_J1939_Vxxyyzz.LIB J1939 communication functions ClassicController: CR0032
ExtendedController: CR0232
ifm_PDM_J1939_Vxxyyzz.LIB J1939 communication functions PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
ifm_CANx_LAYER2_Vxxyyzz.LIB CAN functions on the basis of layer 2: PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
CAN transmit, CAN receive
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
ifm_CAN1E_ Vxxyyzz.LIB changes the CAN bus from 11 bits to 29 up to target V04:
bits
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
ifm_CAN1_EXT_ Vxxyyzz.LIB changes the CAN bus from 11 bits to 29 from target V05:
bits
CabinetController: CR0301, CR0302,
CR0303
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0200
PCB controller: CS0015
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021,
CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500
PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071

279
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Annex Overview of the files and libraries used

File name Function Available for:


CR2013AnalogConverter.LIB analogue value conversion for I/O module all ecomatmobile controllers
CR2013
all PDM360 monitors
ifm_Hydraulic_16bitOS04_Vxxyyzz.LI hydraulic functions for R360 controllers up to target V04:
B
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0200
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7200,
CR7505
SmartController: CR2500
ifm_Hydraulic_16bitOS05_Vxxyyzz.LI hydraulic functions for R360 controllers from target V05:
B
ClassicController: CR0020, CR0505
ExtendedController: CR0200
SafetyController: CR7020, CR7021,
CR7200, CR7201, CR7505, CR7506
SmartController: CR2500
ifm_Hydraulic_32bit_Vxxyyzz.LIB hydraulic functions for R360 controllers ClassicController: CR0032
ExtendedController: CR0232
ifm_SafetyIO_Vxxyyzz.LIB safety functions all ecomatmobile SafetyControllers
ifm_PDM_Util_Vxxyyzz.LIB help functions PDM PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
ifm_PDMsmart_Util_Vxxyyzz.LIB help functions PDM PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
ifm_PDM_Input_Vxxyyzz.LIB alternative input functions PDM all PDM360 monitors
ifm_PDM_Init_Vxxyyzz.LIB initialisation function PDM360 smart PDM360 smart: CR1070, CR1071
ifm_PDM_File_Vxxyyzz.LIB file functions PDM360 PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
Instrumente_x.LIB predefined display instruments all PDM360 monitors
Symbols_x.LIB predefined symbols PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
Segment_x.LIB predefined 7-segment displays PDM360: CR1050, CR1051, CR1060
PDM360 compact: CR1052, CR1053,
CR1055, CR1056
Further libraries on request.

280
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

13 Glossary of C
Terms
CAN
A CAN = Controller Area Network
CAN is a priority controlled fieldbus system for
Address larger data volumes. It is available in different
variants, e.g. "CANopen" or "CAN in
This is the "name" of the bus participant. All Automation" (CiA).
participants need a unique address so that the
signals can be exchanged without problem.
Category (CAT)
Application software Classification of the safety-related parts of a
control system in respect of their resistance to
Software specific to the application, faults and their subsequent behaviour in the
implemented by the machine manufacturer, fault condition. This safety is achieved by the
generally containing logic sequences, limits structural arrangement of the parts, fault
and expressions that control the appropriate detection and/or by their reliability.
inputs, outputs, calculations and decisions
(→ EN 954).
Necessary to meet the specific (→SRP/CS)
requirements.
→ Programming language, safety-related CCF
Common Cause Failure
Failures of different items, resulting from a
Architecture common event, where these failures are not
Specific configuration of hardware and consequences of each other.
software elements in a system.

CiA
B CiA = CAN in Automation e.V.
User and manufacturer organisation in
Baud Germany / Erlangen. Definition and control
Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data body for CAN and CAN-based network
transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with protocols.
"bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates
Homepage → http://www.can-cia.org
the number of changes of state (steps, cycles)
per second over a transmission length. But it is
not defined how many bits per step are
transmitted. The name baud can be traced CiA DS 304
back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot DS = Draft Standard
whose code was used for telex machines.
CAN device profile CANopen safety for safety-
1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd related communication.

Bus CiA DS 401


Serial data transmission of several participants DS = Draft Standard
on the same cable.
CAN device profile for digital and analogue I/O
modules

281
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

CiA DS 402 CoDeSys


DS = Draft Standard CoDeSys® is a registered trademark of 3S –
Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany.
CAN device profile for drives
"CoDeSys for Automation Alliance" associates
companies of the automation industry whose
CiA DS 403 hardware devices are all programmed with the
widely used IEC 61131-3 development tool
DS = Draft Standard CoDeSys®.
CAN device profile for HMI Homepage → http://www.3s-software.com

CiA DS 404 Cycle time


DS = Draft Standard This is the time for a cycle. The PLC program
CAN device profile for measurement and performs one complete run.
control technology Depending on event-controlled branchings in
the program this can take longer or shorter.

CiA DS 405
DS = Draft Standard D
Specification for interface to programmable
controllers (IEC 61131-3) DC
Direct Current

CiA DS 406
DS = Draft Standard DC
CAN device profile for encoders Diagnostic Coverage
Diagnostic coverage is the measure of the
effectiveness of diagnostics as the ratio
between the failure rate of detected dangerous
CiA DS 407 failures and the failure rate of total dangerous
DS = Draft Standard failures:
CAN application profile for local public Formula: DC = failure rate detected dangerous failures /
transport total dangerous failures
Designation Range

none DC < 60 %
Clamp 15
low 60 % < DC < 90 %
In vehicles clamp 15 is the plus cable switched
by the ignition lock. medium 90 % < DC < 99 %
high 99 % < DC

Table: Diagnostic coverage DC


COB-ID
An accuracy of 5 % is assumed for the limit
COB = Communication Object
values shown in the table.
ID = Identifier
Diagnostic coverage can be determined for the
Via the COB-ID the participants distinguish the
whole safety-related system or for only parts of
different messages to be exchanged.
the safety-related system.

282
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

Demand rate rd The actual implementation may vary according


to the application and the requested safety:
The demand rate rd is the frequency of
demands to a safety-related reaction of an • use of components of several
SRP/CS per time unit. manufacturers,
• use of different protocols to control
devices,
Diagnostic coverage
• use of totally different technologies, for
Diagnostic Coverage example an electrical and a pneumatic
Diagnostic coverage is the measure of the controller,
effectiveness of diagnostics as the ratio
between the failure rate of detected dangerous • use of different measuring methods
failures and the failure rate of total dangerous (current, voltage),
failures: • two channels with reverse value
Formula: DC = failure rate detected dangerous failures / progression:
total dangerous failures channel A: 0...100 %
channel B: 100...0 %
Designation Range

none DC < 60 %

low 60 % < DC < 90 % E


medium 90 % < DC < 99 %
high 99 % < DC
EDS-file
Table: Diagnostic coverage DC EDS = Electronic Data Sheet, e.g. for:
• File for the object directory in the master
An accuracy of 5 % is assumed for the limit
values shown in the table. • CANopen device descriptions
Diagnostic coverage can be determined for the Via EDS devices and programs can exchange
whole safety-related system or for only parts of their specifications and consider them in a
the safety-related system. simplified way.

Dither Embedded software


Dither is a component of the PWM signals to System software, basic program in the device,
control hydraulic valves. It has shown for virtually the operating system.
electromagnetic drives of hydraulic valves that
it is much easier for controlling the valves if the The firmware establishes the connection
control signal (PWM pulse) is superimposed by between the hardware of the device and the
a certain frequency of the PWM frequency. user software. This software is provided by the
This dither frequency must be an integer part manufacturer of the controller as a part of the
of the PWM frequency. system and cannot be changed by the user.
→ chapter What is the dither? (→ page 180)

EMCY
Diversity abbreviation for emergency
In technology diversity is a strategy to increase
failure safety.
EMV
The systems are designed redundantly,
however different implementations are used EMC = Electro Magnetic Compatibility
intentionally and not any individual systems of According to the EC directive (2004/108/EEC)
the same design. It is assumed that systems of concerning electromagnetic compatibility (in
the same performance, however of different short EMC directive) requirements are made
implementation, are sensitive or insensitive to for electrical and electronic apparatus,
different interference and will therefore not fail equipment, systems or components to operate
simultaneously. satisfactorily in the existing electromagnetic

283
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

environment. The devices must not interfere hardware failure is less likely to lead to the
with their environment and must not be overall dangerous or fail-to-function state.
adversely influenced by external
electromagnetic interference.
Failure, systematic
A systematic failure is a failure related in a
Ethernet
deterministic way (not coincidental) to a certain
Ethernet is a widely used, manufacturer- cause. The systematic failure can only be
independent technology which enables data eliminated by a modification of the design or of
transmission in the network at a speed of 10 or the manufacturing process, operational
100 million bits per second (Mbps). Ethernet procedures, documentation or other relevant
belongs to the family of so-called "optimum factors.
data transmission" on a non exclusive
Corrective maintenance without modification of
transmission medium. The concept was
the system will usually not eliminate the failure
developed in 1972 and specified as
cause.
IEEE 802.3 in 1985.

EUC Fault
A fault is the state of an item characterized by
EUC = "Equipment Under Control"
the inability to perform the requested function,
EUC is equipment, machinery, apparatus or excluding the inability during preventive
plant used for manufacturing, process, maintenance or other planned actions, or due
transportation, medical or other activities to lack of external resources.
(→ IEC 61508-4, section 3.2.3). Therefore, the
A fault is often the result of a failure of the item
EUC is the set of all equipment, machinery,
itself, but may exist without prior failure.
apparatus or plant that gives rise to hazards
for which the safety-related system is required. In ISO 13849-1 "fault" means "random fault".
If any reasonably foreseeable action or
inaction leads to hazards with an intolerable
risk arising from the EUC, then safety functions Fault tolerance time
are necessary to achieve or maintain a safe The max. time it may take between the
state for the EUC. These safety functions are occurrence of a fault and the establishment of
performed by one or more safety-related the safe state in the application without having
systems. to assume a danger for people.
The max. cycle time of the application program
F (in the worst case 100 ms, → Watchdog,
→ page 44) and the possible delay and
response times due to switching elements
Failure have to be considered.
Failure is the termination of the ability of an The resulting total time must be smaller than
item to perform a required function. the fault tolerance time of the application.
After a failure, the item has a fault. Failure is
an event, fault is a state.
Firmware
The concept as defined does not apply to
items consisting of software only. System software, basic program in the device,
virtually the operating system.
The firmware establishes the connection
Failure, dangerous between the hardware of the device and the
A dangerous failure has the potential to put the user software. This software is provided by the
SRP/SC in a hazardous or fail-to-function manufacturer of the controller as a part of the
state. Whether or not the potential is realized system and cannot be changed by the user.
can depend on the channel architecture of the
system; in redundant systems a dangerous

284
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

First fault occurrence time Heartbeat


Time until the first failure of a safety element. The participants regularly send short signals.
In this way the other participants can verify if a
The operating system verifies the controller by
participant has failed. No master is necessary.
means of the internal monitoring and test
routines within a period of max. 30 s.
This "test cycle time" must be smaller than the I
statistical first fault occurrence time for the
application.
ID
ID = Identifier
Functional safety Name to differentiate the devices / participants
Part of the overall safety referred to the →EUC connected to a system or the message
and the EUC control system which depends on packets transmitted between the participants.
the correct functioning of the electric or
electronic safety-related system, safety-related
systems of other technologies and external Instructions
devices for risk reduction.
Superordinate word for one of the following
terms:
H installation instructions, data sheet, user
information, operating instructions, device
manual installation information, online help,
Harm system manual, programming manual, etc.
Physical injury or damage to health.
Intended use
Hazard Use of a product in accordance with the
information provided in the instructions for use.
Hazard is the potential source of harm.
A distinction is made between the source of
the hazard, e.g.: IP address
- mechanical hazard,
- electrical hazard, IP = Internet Protocol
or the nature of the potential harm, e.g.: The IP address is a number which is
- electric shock hazard, necessary to clearly identify an internet
- cutting hazard, participant. For the sake of clarity the number
- toxic hazard. is written in 4 decimal values, e.g.
The hazard envisaged in this definition is either 127.215.205.156.
permanently present during the intended use
of the machine, e.g.:
- motion of hazardous moving elements, L
- electric arc during a welding phase,
- unhealthy posture, LED
- noise emission,
- high temperature, LED = Light Emitting Diode
or the hazard may appear unexpectedly, e.g.: Light emitting diode, also called luminescent
- explosion, diode, an electronic element of high coloured
- crushing hazard as a consequence of an luminosity at small volume with negligible
unintended/unexpected start-up, power loss.
- ejection as a consequence of a breakage,
- fall as a consequence of
acceleration/deceleration.
Life, mean
Mean Time To Failure (MTTF) or: mean life.

285
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

The MTTFd is the expectation of the mean time


to dangerous failure. Monitoring
Designation Range Safety function which ensures that a protective
low 3 years < MTTFd < 10 years measure is initiated:
medium 10 years < MTTFd < 30 years • if the ability of a component or an element
to perform its function is diminished.
high 30 years < MTTFd < 100 years
Table: Mean time of each channel to the dangerous failure • if the process conditions are changed in
MTTFd such a way that the resulting risk
increases.

Link
MTBF
A link is a cross-reference to another part in
the document or to an external document. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
Is the expected value of the operating time
between two consecutive failures of items that
M are maintained.
NOTE: For items that are NOT maintained the
MAC-ID mean life →MTTF is the expected value (mean
value) of the distribution of lives.
MAC = Manufacturer‘s Address Code =
manufacturer's serial number
→ID = Identifier MTTF
Every network card has a MAC address, a Mean Time To Failure (MTTF) or: mean life.
clearly defined worldwide unique numerical
code, more or less a kind of serial number.
Such a MAC address is a sequence of
MTTFd
6 hexadecimal numbers, e.g. "00-0C-6E-D0-
02-3F". Mean Time To Failure (MTTF) or: mean life.
The MTTFd is the expectation of the mean time
to dangerous failure.
Master
Designation Range
Handles the complete organisation on the bus.
low 3 years < MTTFd < 10 years
The master decides on the bus access time
and polls the →slaves cyclically. medium 10 years < MTTFd < 30 years
high 30 years < MTTFd < 100 years
Table: Mean time of each channel to the dangerous failure
Mission time TM MTTFd
Mission time TM is the period of time covering
the intended use of an SRP/CS.
Muting
Muting is the temporary automatic suspension
Misuse
of a safety function(s) by the SRP/CS.
The use of a product in a way not intended by
Example: The safety light curtain is bridged, if
the designer.
the closing tools have reached a finger-proof
The manufacturer of the product has to warn distance to each other. The operator can now
against readily predictable misuse in his user approach the machine without any danger and
information. guide the workpiece.

286
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

N Operational
Operating state of a CANopen participant. In
NMT this mode SDOs, NMT commands and PDOs
can be transferred.
NMT = Network Management = (here: in the
CAN bus)
The NMT master controls the operating states P
of the NMT slaves.
PC card
Node →PCMCIA card

This means a participant in the network.


PCMCIA card
Node Guarding PCMCIA = Personal Computer Memory Card
International Association, a standard for
Network participant expansion cards of mobile computers.
Since the introduction of the cardbus standard
Configurable cyclic monitoring of each slave
in 1995 PCMCIA cards have also been called
configured accordingly. The master verfies if
PC card.
the slaves reply in time. The slaves verify if the
master regularly sends requests. In this way
failed network participants can be quickly
identified and reported. PDO
PDO = Process Data Object

O The time-critical process data is transferred by


means of the "process data objects" (PDOs).
The PDOs can be freely exchanged between
Obj / object the individual nodes (PDO linking). In addition
Term for data / messages which can be it is defined whether data exchange is to be
exchanged in the CANopen network. event-controlled (asynchronous) or
synchronised. Depending on the type of data
to be transferred the correct selection of the
type of transmission can lead to considerable
Object directory relief for the CAN bus.
Contains all CANopen communication These services are not confirmed by the
parameters of a device as well as device- protocol, i.e. it is not checked whether the
specific parameters and data. message reaches the receiver. Exchange of
network variables corresponds to a "1 to
n connection" (1 transmitter to n receivers).
OBV
Contains all CANopen communication
parameters of a device as well as device- Performance Level
specific parameters and data. Performance Level
According to ISO 13849-1, a specification
(PL a...e) of safety-related parts of control
systems to perform a safety function under
Operating system foreseeable conditions.
Basic program in the device, establishes the
connection between the hardware of the
device and the user software. PES
Programmable Electronic System
A programmable electronic system is a system
...
- for control, protection or monitoring,

287
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

- dependent for its operation on one or more


programmable electronic devices, Programming language, safety-
- including all elements of the system such as related
input and output devices.
Only the following programming languages
shall be used for safety-related applications:
Pictogram • Limited variability language (LVL) that
Pictograms are figurative symbols which provides the capability of combining
convey information by a simplified graphic predefined, application-specific library
representation. functions.
In CoDeSys these are LD (ladder diagram)
→ Chapter What do the symbols and formats and FBD (function block diagram).
stand for? (→ page 7)
• Full variability language (FVL) provides the
capability of implementing a wide variety of
functions.
PL
These include e.g. C, C++, Assembler. In
Performance Level CoDeSys it is ST (structured text).
According to ISO 13849-1, a specification
► Structured text is recommended
(PL a...e) of safety-related parts of control
exclusively in separate, certified functions,
systems to perform a safety function under
usually in embedded software.
foreseeable conditions.
► In the "normal" application program only
LD and FBD should be used. The following
PLr minimum requirements shall be met.
Using the "required performance level" PLr the In general the following minimum requirements
risk reduction for each safety function are made on the safety-related application
according to ISO 13849 is achieved. software (SRASW):
For each selected safety function to be carried ► Modular and clear structure of the
out by a SRP/CS, a PLr shall be determined program. Consequence: simple testability.
and documented. The determination of the PLr ► Functions are represented in a
is the result of the risk assessment and refers comprehensible manner:
to the amount of the risk reduction. - for the operator on the screen
(navigation)
- readability of a subsequent print of the
Pre-Op document.
Pre-Op = Preoperational mode ► Use symbolic variables (no IEC
Operating status of a CANopen participant. addresses).
After application of the supply voltage each ► Use meaningful variable names and
participant automatically passes into this state. comments.
In the CANopen network only SDOs and NMT
commands can be transferred in this mode but ► Use easy functions (no indirect
no process data. addressing, no variable fields).
► Defensive programming.
► Easy extension or adaptation of the
prepared program possible.
Operating status of a CANopen participant. In
this mode only NMT commands are
transferred. Protective measure
Measure intended to achieve risk reduction,
e.g.:
- fault-excluding design,
- safeguarding measures (guards),
- complementary protective measures (user

288
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

information), avoid that a systematic fault causes all


- personal protective equipment (helmet, redundant systems to fail (diverse
protective goggles). redundancy).
The software of redundant systems should
differ in the following aspects:
PWM
• specification (different teams),
PWM = pulse width modulation
• specification language,
Via PWM a digital output (capability provided
by the device) can provide an almost analogue • programming (different teams),
voltage by means of regular fast pulses. The
PWM output signal is a pulsed signal between • programming language,
GND and supply voltage. • compiler.
Within a defined period (PWM frequency) the
mark-to-space ratio is varied. Depending on
the mark-to-space ratio, the connected load remanent
determines the corresponding RMS current. Remanent data is protected against data loss
→ chapter PWM signal processing in case of power failure.
(→ page 161)
→ chapter What does a PWM output do? The operating system for example
(→ page 179) automatically copies the remanent data to a
flash memory as soon as the voltage supply
falls below a critical value. If the voltage supply
R is available again, the operating system loads
the remanent data back to the RAM memory.

Ratio The data in the RAM memory of a controller,


however, is volatile and normally lost in case of
Measurements can also be performed power failure.
ratiometrically. The input signal generates an
output signal which is in a defined ratio to the
input signal. This means that analogue input Reset, manual
signals can be evaluated without additional
reference voltage. A fluctuation of the supply The manual reset is an internal function within
voltage has no influence on this measured the SRP/CS used to restore manually one or
value. more safety functions before re-starting a
→ Chapter Counter functions (→ page 200) machine.

redundant Residual risk


Redundancy is the presence of more than the Risk remaining after protective measures have
necessary means so that a function unit been taken. The residual risk has to be clearly
performs a requested function or that data can warned against in operating instructions and
represent information. on the machine.

Several kinds of redundancy are distinguished:


• Functional redundancy aims at designing Risk
safety-related systems in multiple ways in Combination of the probability of occurrence of
parallel so that in the event of a failure of harm and the severity of that harm.
one component the others ensure the task.
• In addition it is tried to separate redundant
systems from each other with regard to Risk analysis
space. Thus the risk that they are affected
Combination of ...
by a common interference is minimised.
• the specification of the limits of the
• Finally, components from different
machine (intended use, time limits),
manufacturers are sometimes used to

289
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

• hazard identification (intervention of - bring the machine into a safe state in time in
people, operating status of the machine, the event of a failure of the safety function.
foreseeable misuse) and
• the risk estimation (degree of injury, extent Safety-standard types
of damage, frequency and duration of the
risk, probability of occurrence, possibility of The safety standards in the field of machines
avoiding the hazard or limiting the harm). are structured as below:
Type-A standards (basic safety standards)
giving basic concepts, principles for design,
Risk assessment and general aspects that can be applied to all
Overall process comprising risk analysis and machinery. Examples: basic terminology,
risk evaluation. methodology (ISO 12100-1), technical
principles (ISO 12100-2), risk assessment
According to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EU (ISO 14121), ...
the following applies: "The manufacturer of
machinery or his authorised representative Type-B standards (generic safety standards)
must ensure that a risk assessment is carried dealing with one safety aspect or one type of
out in order to determine the health and safety safeguard that can be used across a wide
requirements which apply to the machinery. range of machinery.
The machinery must then be designed and • Type-B1 standards on particular safety
constructed taking into account the results of aspects. Examples: safety distances
the risk assessment." (→ Annex 1, General (EN 294), hand/arm speeds (EN 999),
principles) safety-related parts of control systems
(ISO 13849), temperatures, noise, ...
• Type-B2 standards on safeguards.
Risk evaluation
Examples: emergency stop circuits
Judgement, on the basis of the risk analysis, of ((ISO 13850), two-hand controls,
whether risk reduction objectives have been interlocking devices or electro-sensitive
achieved. protective equipment (ISO 61496), ...
Type-C standards (machine safety standards)
dealing with detailed safety requirements for a
ro particular machine or group of machines.
RO = read only for reading only
Unidirectional data transmission: Data can only SCT
be read and not changed.
In CANopen safety the Safeguard Cycle Time
(SCT) monitors the correct function of the
rw periodic transmission (data refresh) of the
SRDOs. The data must have been repeated
RW = read/ write within the set time to be valid. Otherwise the
Bidirectional data transmission: Data can be receiving controller signals a fault and passes
read and also changed. into the safe state (= outputs switched off).

S SDO
SDO = Service Data Object.
Safety function SDO is a specification for a manufacturer-
Function of the machine whose failure can dependent data structure for standardised data
result in an immediate increase of the risk(s). access. "Clients" ask for the requested data
The designer of such a machine therefore has from "servers". The SDOs always consist of
to: 8 bytes. Longer data packages are distributed
- safely prevent a failure of the safety function, to several messages.
- reliably detect a failure of the safety function
in time,

290
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

Examples: SRVT
• Automatic configuration of all slaves via The SRVT (Safety-Related Object Validation
SDOs at the system start, Time) ensures with CANopen safety that the
time between the SRDO-message pairs is
• reading error messages from the object adhered to.
directory.
Only if the redundant, inverted message has
Every SDO is monitored for a response and been transmitted after the original message
repeated if the slave does not respond within within the SRVT set are the transmitted data
the monitoring time. valid. Otherwise the receiving controller signals
a fault and will pass into the safe state
(= outputs switched off).
SIL
According to IEC 62061 the safety-integrity
level SIL is a classification (SIL CL 1...4) of the State, safe
safety integrity of the safety functions. It is The state of a machine is said to be safe when
used for the evaluation of there is no more hazard formed by it. This is
electrical/electronic/programmable electronic usually the case if all possible dangerous
(E/E/EP) systems with regard to the reliability movements are switched off and cannot start
of safety functions. The safety-related design again unexpectedly.
principles that have to be adhered to so that
the risk of a malfunction can be minimised
result from the required level.
Symbols
Pictograms are figurative symbols which
Slave convey information by a simplified graphic
representation.
Passive participant on the bus, only replies on
request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly → Chapter What do the symbols and formats
defined and unique →address in the bus. stand for? (→ page 7)

SRDO T
Safe data is exchanged via SRDOs (Safety-
Related Data Objects). An SRDO always Target
consists of two CAN messages with different The target indicates the target system where
identifiers: the PLC program is to run. The target contains
• message 1 contains the original user data, the files (drivers and if available specific help
files) required for programming and parameter
• message 2 contains the same data which setting.
are inverted bit by bit.

TCP
SRP/CS
The Transmission Control Protocol is part of
Safety-Related Part of a Control System the TCP/IP protocol family. Each TCP/IP data
connection has a transmitter and a receiver.
Part of a control system that responds to
This principle is a connection-oriented data
safety-related input signals and generates
transmission. In the TCP/IP protocol family the
safety-related output signals. The combined
TCP as the connection-oriented protocol
safety-related parts of a control system start at
assumes the task of data protection, data flow
the point where the safety-related input signals
control and takes measures in the event of
are initiated (including, for example, the
data loss.
actuating cam and the roller of the position
switch) and end at the output of the power (compare: →UDP)
control elements (including, for example, the
main contacts of a contactor).

291
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Glossary of Terms

Template W
A template can be filled with content.
Here: A structure of pre-configured software Watchdog
elements as basis for an application program. In general the term watchdog is used for a
component of a system which watches the
function of other components. If a possible
Test rate rt malfunction is detected, this is either signalled
The test rate rt is the frequency of the or suitable program branchings are activated.
automatic tests to detect errors in an SRP/CS The signal or branchings serve as a trigger for
in time. other co-operating system components to
solve the problem.

U
wo
UDP WO = write only

UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a minimal Unidirectional data transmission: Data can only
connectionless network protocol which belongs be changed and not read.
to the transport layer of the internet protocol
family. The task of UDP is to ensure that data
which is transmitted via the internet is passed
to the right application.
At present network variables based on CAN
and UDP are implemented. The values of the
variables are automatically exchanged on the
basis of broadcast messages. In UDP they are
implemented as broadcast messages, in CAN
as PDOs. These services are not confirmed by
the protocol, i.e. it is not checked whether the
message is received. Exchange of network
variables corresponds to a "1 to n connection"
(1 transmitter to n receivers).

Uptime, mean
Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF)
Is the expected value of the operating time
between two consecutive failures of items that
are maintained.
NOTE: For items that are NOT maintained the
mean life →MTTF is the expected value (mean
value) of the distribution of lives.

Use, intended
Use of a product in accordance with the
information provided in the instructions for use.

292
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

CAN interfaces .................................................... 48


14 Index CAN network variables...........................48, 83, 108
About the ifm templates ................................. 17, 18
CAN-ID ..........................................................49, 50
About this manual .................................................. 7
CANopen master.....................................83, 85, 127
Above-average stress ........................................... 42
CANopen support by CoDeSys ........................... 83
Access to the CAN device at runtime ................ 107
CANopen terms and implementation................... 84
Access to the OD entries by the application
Category (CAT) ................................................. 283
program.............................................................. 107
CCF.................................................................... 283
Access to the status of the CANopen master ....... 97
Change the PDO properties at runtime .............. 107
Access to the structures at runtime of the
application.......................................................... 128 Changing the standard mapping by the
master configuration .......................................... 106
Activating the PLC configuration ........................ 15
CiA..................................................................... 283
Adapting analogue values .................................. 253
CiA DS 304........................................................ 283
Add and configure CANopen slaves............ 89, 106
CiA DS 401........................................................ 283
Address .............................................................. 283
CiA DS 402........................................................ 284
Address assignment inputs / outputs .................. 272
CiA DS 403........................................................ 284
Addresses / variables of the I/Os........................ 272
CiA DS 404........................................................ 284
Address assignment and I/O operating modes ... 272
CiA DS 405........................................................ 284
Analogue inputs ................................................... 31
CiA DS 406........................................................ 284
Analogue inputs ANALOG4...7 (%IW6...%IW9) ...
............................................................................. 31 CiA DS 407........................................................ 284
Annex..................................................... 13, 29, 271 Clamp 15............................................................ 284
Application software .......................................... 283 COB-ID.............................................................. 284
Applications ....................................................... 201 CoDeSys ............................................................ 284
Architecture........................................................ 283 CoDeSys® CANopen libraries .......................... 278
Automatic data backup....................................... 216 Configuration of CAN network variables .......... 108
Available memory................................................ 44 Configurations ..................................................... 13
Baud ................................................................... 283 Configure inputs .................................................. 29
Boot up of the CANopen master.......................... 94 Configure outputs ................................................ 33
Boot up of the CANopen slaves........................... 95 Control hydraulic valves with current-controlled
outputs................................................................ 179
Bus ..................................................................... 283
Controlled system with delay............................. 257
Bus cable length ................................................... 53
Controlled system without inherent regulation ........
Bus level .............................................................. 52
........................................................................... 257
Calculation examples RELOAD value .............. 163
Controller functions in the ecomatmobile controller
Calculation of the RELOAD value .................... 162 ........................................................................... 256
CAN ................................................................... 283 Counter functions for frequency and period
measurement .......................................200, 273, 291
CAN device.................................................. 83, 100
Create a CANopen project ................................... 86
CAN device configuration ................................. 101
Current control with PWM .........................172, 273
CAN errors and error handling ...................... 51, 55
Current measurement with PWM channels........ 172
CAN in the ecomatmobile controller ................... 47

293
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

Cycle time .......................................................... 284 Example with function CANx_MASTER_STATUS


........................................................................... 127
Damping of overshoot........................................ 258
Example with function
Data access and data check ................................ 223
CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY ........... 135
Data reception ...................................................... 50
Examples NORM_HYDRAULIC ..................... 199
Data transmission................................................. 50
Exchange of CAN data ...................................49, 51
DC...................................................................... 284
Failure ................................................................ 286
DEBUG mode...................................................... 38
Failure, dangerous.............................................. 286
Demand rate rd................................................... 285
Failure, systematic ............................................. 286
Demo program for controller ............................... 25
Fast inputs............................................................ 30
Demo program for PDM:..................................... 27
Fatal error............................................................. 35
Description of the CAN functions........................ 58
Fault ................................................................... 286
Diagnostic coverage........................................... 285
Fault tolerance time ........................................... 286
Differentiation from other CANopen libraries..... 85
Files for the operating system / runtime system.......
Digital and PWM outputs .................................... 33 ........................................................................... 277
Digital input group I0...I3 (%IX0.0...%IX1.8)..... 32 Firmware............................................................ 286
Digital inputs........................................................ 29 First fault occurrence time ................................. 287
Dither ................................................................. 285 Folder structure in general ................................... 19
Dither frequency and amplitude......................... 181 Function CAN1_BAUDRATE ...............58, 59, 107
Diversity............................................................. 285 Function CAN1_DOWNLOADID ...................... 61
EDS-file ............................................................. 285 Function CAN1_EXT ...................................63, 107
Embedded software............................................ 285 Function CAN1_EXT_ERRORHANDLER........ 69
EMCY................................................................ 285 Function CAN1_EXT_RECEIVE ....................... 67
EMV................................................................... 285 Function CAN1_EXT_TRANSMIT.................... 65
Error codes and diagnostic information ............... 39 Function CAN2.........................................58, 70, 81
Error counter ........................................................ 56 Function CANx_ERRORHANDLER.................. 81
Error message....................................................... 55 Function CANx_EXT_RECEIVE_ALL.............. 79
Ethernet.............................................................. 286 Function CANx_MASTER_EMCY_HANDLER
....................................................................114, 118
EUC ................................................................... 286
Function CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY
Example 1 .......................................................... 255 ....................................................................114, 120
Example 2 .......................................................... 255 Function CANx_MASTER_STATUS.....................
Example Dither .................................................. 182 ..........................92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 123, 127
Example for CHECK_DATA ............................ 231 Function CANx_RECEIVE ................49, 50, 74, 76
Example Initialisation of Function CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE ................. 76
CANx_RECEIVE_RANGE in 4 cycles......... 76, 78 Function CANx_SDO_READ ......................86, 140
Example of an object directory .......................... 101 Function CANx_SDO_WRITE ....................86, 142
Example process for response to a system error ...... Function CANx_SLAVE_EMCY_HANDLER.......
............................................................................. 41 ....................................................100, 107, 114, 131
Example with function Function CANx_SLAVE_NODEID...........107, 130
CANx_MASTER_SEND_EMERGENCY........ 122

294
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

Function CANx_SLAVE_SEND_EMERGENCY Function PHASE...........................................30, 208


....................................................100, 107, 114, 133
Function PID1.................................................... 264
Function CANx_SLAVE_STATUS .......... 107, 136
Function PID2.................................................... 266
Function CANx_TRANSMIT.................. 49, 50, 72
Function PT1...............................................258, 262
Function CHECK_DATA.................................. 230
Function PWM....................................161, 162, 166
Function configuration of the inputs and outputs.....
Function PWM100............................................. 168
............................................................................. 29
Function PWM1000....................161, 162, 168, 170
Function CONTROL_OCC ....................... 182, 183
Function SERIAL_PENDING........................... 245
Function DELAY............................................... 260
Function SERIAL_RX................................243, 245
Function E2READ ..................................... 216, 222
Function SERIAL_SETUP ................................ 240
Function E2WRITE ................................... 216, 221
Function SERIAL_TX ....................................... 242
Function FAST_COUNT............................. 30, 213
Function SET_DEBUG ................................38, 223
Function FLASHREAD............................. 216, 220
Function SET_IDENTITY..........................224, 226
Function FLASHWRITE ........................... 216, 218
Function SET_INTERRUPT_I .......................... 236
Function FREQUENCY ...................... 30, 201, 202
Function SET_INTERRUPT_XMS................... 233
Function GET_IDENTITY ................................ 226
Function SET_PASSWORD ............................. 228
Function GLR .................................................... 269
Function SOFTRESET ...................................... 215
Function INC_ENCODER................................. 210
Function TIMER_READ ................................... 246
Function INPUT_ANALOG........................ 31, 249
Function TIMER_READ_US ............................ 247
Function INPUT_CURRENT ............................ 252
Functional safety................................................ 287
Function INPUT_VOLTAGE............................ 251
Functionality ...................................................... 100
Function J1939_x............................................... 148
Functions for controllers .................................... 259
Function J1939_x_GLOBAL_REQUEST......... 158
Functions of the library...................................... 182
Function J1939_x_RECEIVE ............................ 150
Further ifm libraries for CANopen .................... 139
Function J1939_x_RESPONSE ......................... 154
General............................................................9, 256
Function J1939_x_SPECIFIC_REQUEST ........ 156
General about CAN ............................................. 47
Function J1939_x_TRANSMIT......................... 152
General information ........................................... 108
Function JOYSTICK_0.............................. 182, 186
General information about CANopen with
Function JOYSTICK_1.............................. 182, 190
CoDeSys .............................................................. 83
Function JOYSTICK_2.............................. 182, 194
General overview............................................... 275
Function MEMCPY ........................................... 217
Harm .................................................................. 287
Function NORM ................................................ 254
Hazard................................................................ 287
Function NORM_HYDRAULIC ............... 182, 197
Heartbeat............................................................ 287
Function OCC_TASK................................ 175, 182
Hints to wiring diagrams...................................... 34
Function OUTPUT_CURRENT ..............................
How is this manual structured?.............................. 8
..............................33, 167, 169, 171, 177, 182, 183
Hydraulic control in PWM................................. 178
Function OUTPUT_CURRENT_CONTROL .........
........................................................... 173, 182, 183 ID ....................................................................... 287
Function PERIOD ................................ 30, 201, 204 ifm CANopen libraries master / slave................ 278
Function PERIOD_RATIO.......................... 30, 206 ifm CANopen library ......................................48, 83

295
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

ifm demo programs .............................................. 25 Obj / object ........................................................ 289


ifm device libraries............................................. 277 Object directory ................................................. 289
Information concerning the device....................... 11 OBV................................................................... 289
Information concerning the software ................... 11 Operating modes .................................................. 37
Information on the EMCY and error codes.............. Operating states.................................................... 35
................................................................... 113, 128
Operating states and operating system................. 35
Initialisation of the network with
Operating system ............................................... 289
RESET_ALL_NODES ........................................ 97
Operational ........................................................ 289
Instructions......................................................... 287
Output group Q0...Q4 (%QX0.0...%QX1.8)........ 33
Intended use ....................................................... 287
Overview CANopen EMCY codes .................... 117
IP address ........................................................... 287
Overview of CANopen error codes ............114, 115
LED.................................................................... 287
Overview of the files and libraries used............. 275
Library for the CANopen master ....................... 117
Parameters of internal structures........................ 126
Library for the CANopen slave.......................... 129
Participant, bus off............................................... 57
Life, mean .......................................................... 287
Participant, error active........................................ 56
Limits of the SmartController .............................. 43
Participant, error passive...................................... 56
Link.................................................................... 288
Particularities for network variables ...........109, 112
Load the operating system ................................... 37
PC card............................................................... 289
MAC-ID............................................................. 288
PCMCIA card .................................................... 289
Manual data storage ........................................... 216
PDO ................................................................... 289
Master ................................................................ 288
Performance Level............................................. 289
Master at runtime ................................................. 91
PES .................................................................... 289
Mission time TM................................................ 288
Physical connection of CAN................................ 51
Misuse................................................................ 288
Physical structure of ISO 11992-1 ....................... 54
Monitoring ......................................................... 288
Pictogram........................................................... 290
More functions in the ecomatmobile controller .......
........................................................................... 200 PL....................................................................... 290
MTBF................................................................. 288 PLC configuration................................................ 12
MTTF................................................................. 288 PLC configuration file ....................................... 277
MTTFd............................................................... 288 PLr ..................................................................... 290
Muting................................................................ 288 Possible operating modes inputs / outputs ......... 273
Network states...................................................... 94 Pre-Op................................................................ 290
Network structure................................................. 51 prepared ............................................................. 290
NMT................................................................... 289 Processing analogue input values ...................... 248
No operating system............................................. 36 Processing interrupts.......................................... 232
Node................................................................... 289 Program creation and download in the PLC ........ 45
Node Guarding................................................... 289 Programming and system resources..................... 42
Nodeguarding/heartbeat error .............................. 96 Programming language, safety-related............... 290
Notes on devices with monitoring relay............... 40 Programs and functions in the folders of the
templates .............................................................. 19

296
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

Protective measure ............................................. 290 Set up programming system via templates........... 16


PWM.................................................................. 291 Setting control.................................................... 258
PWM / PWM1000 ............................................. 161 Setting of the node numbers and the baud rate
of a CAN device ................................................ 107
PWM channels 0...3 ........................................... 162
Setting rule for a controller ................................ 258
PWM channels 4...7 / 8...11 ............................... 163
Settings in the global variable lists .................... 109
PWM dither........................................................ 164
Settings in the target settings ............................. 108
PWM frequency ................................................. 161
Setup the target ...............................................14, 86
PWM functions and their parameters (general) .......
........................................................................... 161 Signalling of device errors ................................. 114
PWM in the ecomatmobile controller ................ 160 SIL ..................................................................... 293
PWM signal processing ......161, 165, 182, 273, 291 Slave .................................................................. 293
Ramp function.................................................... 165 Slave information............................................... 127
Ratio................................................................... 291 Software for CAN and CANopen ........................ 55
Reading the system time .................................... 246 Software reset .................................................... 215
Recommended setting ................................ 265, 268 Specific ifm libraries.......................................... 279
redundant............................................................ 291 SRDO................................................................. 293
remanent............................................................. 291 SRP/CS .............................................................. 293
Reset..................................................................... 35 SRVT ................................................................. 293
Reset, manual..................................................... 291 Standardise the output signals of a joystick ....... 178
Residual risk....................................................... 291 Start the network.............................................93, 94
Response to the system error................................ 40 Starting the network with GLOBAL_START ..... 96
Risk .................................................................... 291 Starting the network with START_ALL_NODES
............................................................................. 97
Risk analysis ...................................................... 291
State, safe........................................................... 293
Risk assessment ................................................. 292
Status LED........................................................... 36
Risk evaluation................................................... 292
Stop state.............................................................. 35
ro ........................................................................ 292
Structure Emergency_Message.......................... 128
Run state .............................................................. 35
Structure node status .......................................... 127
rw ....................................................................... 292
Structure of an EMCY message......................... 113
Safety function ................................................... 292
Structure of the visualisations in the templates.... 22
Safety instructions.................................................. 9
Summary CAN / CANopen ............................... 144
Safety-standard types ......................................... 292
Supplement project with further functions......18, 23
Saving, reading and converting data in the memory
........................................................................... 216 Symbols ............................................................. 293
SCT .................................................................... 292 System configuration ........................................... 48
SDO ................................................................... 292 System description............................................... 11
Self-regulating process....................................... 256 System flags..................................................40, 274
SERIAL_MODE.................................................. 38 Tab [Base settings]............................................. 101
Set up programming system................................. 14 Tab [CAN parameters]....................................87, 89
Set up programming system manually ................. 14 Tab [CAN settings]............................................ 103

297
ifm System Manual ecomatmobile SmartController (CR2500) V05

Index

Tab [Default PDO mapping].............................. 104


Tab [Receive PDO-Mapping] and [Send PDO-
Mapping].............................................................. 90
Tab [Service Data Objects] .................. 91, 140, 142
Target ................................................................. 293
Target file........................................................... 277
TCP .................................................................... 293
Template ............................................................ 294
TEST mode .................................................... 35, 38
Test rate rt .......................................................... 294
The object directory of the CANopen master ..........
..................................................................... 97, 108
The purpose of this library? – An introduction ........
........................................................................... 178
Topology.............................................................. 47
Transmit emergency messages via the
application program ........................................... 107
UDP ................................................................... 294
Uptime, mean..................................................... 294
Use as digital inputs ........................................... 201
Use of the CAN interfaces to SAE J1939 ................
..........................................................48, 63, 70, 145
Use of the serial interface............................. 38, 239
Use, intended...................................................... 294
Watchdog ........................................................... 294
Watchdog behaviour .................................... 44, 286
What are the individual files and libraries used for?
........................................................................... 277
What do the symbols and formats mean?.................
............................................................... 7, 290, 293
What does a PWM output do? ................... 179, 291
What is the dither? ..................................... 180, 285
What previous knowledge is required? ................ 10
When is a dither useful?..................................... 180
Wire cross-sections .............................................. 54
wo....................................................................... 294

298

You might also like